Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Precalculus
C
O
Teachers Guide
EP
E
Department of Education
Republic of the Philippines
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Precalculus
Teachers Guide
First Edition 2016
Republic Act 8293. Section 176 states that: No copyright shall subsist in any work
of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government agency or
office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work for profit.
Such agency or office may, among other things, impose as a condition the payment of
royalties.
PY
Borrowed materials (i.e., songs, stories, poems, pictures, photos, brand names,
trademarks, etc.) included in this learning resource are owned by their respective copyright
holders. DepEd is represented by the Filipinas Copyright Licensing Society (FILCOLS), Inc.
in seeking permission to use these materials from their respective copyright owners. All
means have been exhausted in seeking permission to use these materials. The publisher
and authors do not represent nor claim ownership over them.
C
O
Only institutions and companies which have entered an agreement with FILCOLS
and only within the agreed framework may copy from this Teachers Guide. Those who
have not entered in an agreement with FILCOLS must, if they wish to copy, contact the
publishers and authors directly.
Authors and publishers may email or contact FILCOLS at filcols@gmail.com or (02)
435-5258, respectively.
EP
E
Writers:
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Table of Contents
1
Unit 1:
PY
6
7
C
O
EP
E
iii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
81
PY
C
O
EP
E
122
Unit 3:
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
References
305
EP
E
C
O
PY
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The Precalculus course bridges basic mathematics and calculus. This course
completes the foundational knowledge on algebra, geometry, and trigonometry of
students who are planning to take courses in the STEM track. It provides them
with conceptual understanding and computational skills that are prerequisites
for Basic Calculus and future STEM courses.
PY
Based on the Curriculum Guide for Precalculus of the Department of Education (see pages 2-5), the primary aim of this Teaching Guide is to give math
teachers an adequate stand-alone material that can be used for each session of
the Grade 11 Precalculus course.
C
O
The Guide is divided into three units: analytic geometry, summation notation
and mathematical induction, and trigonometry. Each unit is composed of lessons
that bring together related learning competencies in the unit. Each lesson is
further divided into sub-lessons that focus on one or two competencies for effective
teaching and learning. Each sub-lesson is designed for a one-hour session, but the
teachers have the option to extend the time allotment to one-and-a-half hours for
some sub-lessons.
EP
E
Some items are marked with a star. A starred sub-lesson means the discussion
and accomplishment of the sub-lesson are optional. This will be decided by your
teacher. On the other hand, a starred example or exercise means the use of
calculator is required.
To further guide the teachers, Teaching Notes are provided on the margins.
These notes include simple recall of basic definitions and theorems, suggested
teaching methods, alternative answers to some exercises, quick approaches and
techniques in solving particular problems, and common errors committed by students.
We hope that Precalculus teachers will find this Teaching Guide helpful and
convenient to use. We encourage the teachers to study this Guide carefully and
solve the exercises themselves. Although great effort has been put into this Guide
for technical correctness and precision, any mistake found and reported to the
Team is a gain for other teachers. Thank you for your cooperation.
The Precalculus Team
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Semester: First Semester
No. of Hours/ Semester: 80 hours/ semester
Pre-requisite (if needed):
key concepts of
conic sections and
systems of
nonlinear
equations
The learners
demonstrate an
understanding
of...
CONTENT
STANDARDS
model situations
appropriately and solve
problems accurately using
conic sections and systems
of nonlinear equations
PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS
D
LEARNING COMPETENCIES
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
PY
4.
define a parabola
determine the standard form of equation of a parabola
graph a parabola in a rectangular coordinate system
define an ellipse
determine the standard form of equation of an ellipse
graph an ellipse in a rectangular coordinate system
define a hyperbola
determine the standard form of equation of a hyperbola
3.
2.
1.
C
O
The learners...
Analytic
Geometry
CONTENT
Page 1 of 4
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-5
STEM_PC11AG-Ib-1
STEM_PC11AG-Ib-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ic-1
STEM_PC11AG-Ic-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ic-3
STEM_PC11AG-Id-1
STEM_PC11AG-Id-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-4
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-3
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-1
CODE
Subject Description: At the end of the course, the students must be able to apply concepts and solve problems involving conic sections, systems of nonlinear equations,
series and mathematical induction, circular and trigonometric functions, trigonometric identities, and polar coordinate system.
EP
E
Grade: 11
Core Subject Title: Pre-Calculus
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
key concepts of
series and
mathematical
induction and the
Binomial
Theorem.
PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS
EP
E
CONTENT
STANDARDS
14.
15.
PY
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
9.
7.
8.
illustrate a series
1.
C
O
17.
18.
16.
LEARNING COMPETENCIES
13.
Series and
Mathematical
Induction
CONTENT
STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-1
STEM_PC11AG-Ig-2
STEM_PC11AG-If-g-1
STEM_PC11AG-If-1
STEM_PC11AG-Ie-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ie-1
STEM_PC11AG-Id-3
CODE
Page 2 of 4
STEM_PC11SMI-Ij-2
STEM_PC11SMI-Ij-1
STEM_PC11SMI-Ii-3
STEM_PC11SMI-Ii-2
STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-2
STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-3
STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-4
STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-i-1
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. formulate and solve
accurately situational
problems involving
appropriate trigonometric
functions
4. formulate and solve
accurately situational
problems involving the
polar coordinate system
4.
5.
6.
7.
22.
20.
21.
17.
18.
19.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
10.
11.
8.
9.
PY
3.
C
O
2.
LEARNING COMPETENCIES
illustrate the unit circle and the relationship between the linear
and angular measures of a central angle in a unit circle
convert degree measure to radian measure and vice versa
1.
2. apply appropriate
trigonometric identities in
solving situational
problems
PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS
1. formulate and solve
accurately situational
problems involving
circular functions
EP
E
CONTENT
STANDARDS
key concepts of
circular functions,
trigonometric
identities, inverse
trigonometric
functions, and
the polar
coordinate
system
Trigonometry
CONTENT
Page 3 of 4
STEM_PC11T-IIj-3
STEM_PC11T-IIj-2
STEM_PC11T-IIj-1
STEM_PC11T-IIi-2
STEM_PC11T-IIh-2
STEM_PC11T-IIh-i-1
STEM_PC11T-IIh-1
STEM_PC11T-IIf-1
STEM_PC11T-IIf-2
STEM_PC11T-IIf-g-1
STEM_PC11T-IIg-2
STEM_PC11T-IIe-3
STEM_PC11T-IIe-2
STEM_PC11T-IIe-1
STEM_PC11T-IId-2
STEM_PC11T-IIc-d-1
STEM_PC11T-IIb-2
STEM_PC11T-IIc-1
STEM_PC11T-IIb-1
STEM_PC11T-IIa-3
STEM_PC11T-IIa-1
STEM_PC11T-IIa-2
CODE
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Competency
Week
Quarter
Domain/Content/
Component/ Topic
Grade Level
SAMPLE
Science, Technology,
Engineering and Mathematics
Pre-Calculus
Week one
First Quarter
Analytic Geometry
Grade 11
C
O
STEM_PC11AG
DOMAIN/ COMPONENT
PY
Trigonometry
Analytic Geometry
Sample: STEM_PC11AG-Ia-1
Arabic Number
Lowercase
Letter/s
*Zero if no specific
quarter
Roman Numeral
Uppercase
Letter/s
First Entry
LEGEND
EP
E
D
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATHEMATICS (STEM) SPECIALIZED SUBJECT
Page 4 of 4
SMI
AG
CODE
Unit 1
EP
E
C
O
PY
Analytic Geometry
Stretching from Samar to Leyte with a total length of more than two kilometers, the San Juanico Bridge has been serving as one of the main thoroughfares
of economic and social development in the country since its completion in 1973.
Adding picturesque effect on the whole architecture, geometric structures are
subtly built to serve other purposes. The arch-shaped support on the main span
of the bridge helps maximize its strength to withstand mechanical resonance and
aeroelastic flutter brought about by heavy vehicles and passing winds.
6
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Lesson Outline
C
O
(1) Introduction of the four conic sections, along with the degenerate conics
(2) Definition of a circle
(4) Graphing circles
EP
E
Introduction
Ellipse (Figure 1.1) - when the (tilted) plane intersects only one cone to form
a bounded curve
Parabola (Figure 1.2) - when the plane intersects only one cone to form an
unbounded curve
Figure 1.1
C
O
PY
Hyperbola (Figure 1.3) - when the plane (not necessarily vertical) intersects
both cones to form two unbounded curves (each called a branch of the hyperbola)
Figure 1.2
Figure 1.3
We can draw these conic sections (also called conics) on a rectangular coordinate plane and find their equations. To be able to do this, we will present
equivalent definitions of these conic sections in subsequent sections, and use these
to find the equations.
EP
E
There are other ways for a plane and the cones to intersect, to form what are
referred to as degenerate conics: a point, one line, and two lines. See Figures 1.4,
1.5 and 1.6.
Figure 1.4
Figure 1.5
Figure 1.6
8
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
See Figure 1.7, with the point C(3, 1) shown. From the figure, the distance
of A(2, 1) from p
C is AC = 5. By the distance formula, the distance of B(6, 5)
from C is BC = (6 3)2 + (5 1)2 = 5. There are other points P such that
P C = 5. The collection of all such points which are 5 units away from C, forms
a circle.
Figure 1.8
EP
E
Figure 1.7
Let C be a given point. The set of all points P having the same
distance from C is called a circle. The point C is called the center of
the circle, and the common distance its radius.
The term radius is both used to refer to a segment from the center C to a
point P on the circle, and the length of this segment.
See Figure 1.8, where a circle is drawn. It has center C(h, k) and radius r > 0.
A point P (x, y) is on the circle if and only if P C = r. For any such point then,
its coordinates should satisfy the following.
p
PC = r
(x h)2 + (y k)2 = r
(x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2
This is the standard equation of the circle with center C(h, k) and radius r. If
the center is the origin, then h = 0 and k = 0. The standard equation is then
x2 + y 2 = r 2 .
9
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 1.1.1. In each item, give the standard equation of the circle satisfying
the given conditions.
(1) center at the origin, radius 4
PY
EP
E
C
O
Figure 1.9
Solution. (1) x2 + y 2 = 16
(2) (x + 4)2 + (y 3)2 = 7
(3) The center is (3, 1) and the radius is 5, so the equation is (x 3)2 + (y 1)2 =
25.
(4) By inspection, the center is (2, 1) and the radius is 4. The equation is
(x + 2)2 + (y + 1)2 = 16.
(5) Similarly by inspection, we have (x 3)2 + (y 2)2 = 9.
(6) The center is 5 units away from the y-axis, so the radius is r = 5 (you can
make a sketch to see why). The equation is (x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 25.
10
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(7) Similarly, since the center is 6 units away from the x-axis, the equation is
(x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 36.
4+2
3
,
=
,
3
. The
(8) The center C is the midpoint of A and B: C = 1+4
2 q 2
2
q
2
29
radius is then r = AC =
1 32 + (4 3)2 =
. The circle has
4
2
equation x 32 + (y 3)2 = 29
.
2
4
Seatwork/Homework 1.1.2
PY
Find the standard equation of the circle being described in each item.
Answer: x2 + y 2 = 11
(1) With center at the origin, radius 11
(2) With center (6, 7), tangent to the y-axis Answer: (x + 6)2 + (y 7)2 = 36
(3) Has a diameter with endpoints A(3, 2) and B(7, 4)
C
O
can be rewritten as
EP
E
x2 + y 2 3x 6y + 4 = 0,
or
A 6= 0,
x2 + y 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0,
we can determine the standard form by completing the square in both variables.
Teaching Notes
Recall the
technique of
completing the
square. This was
introduced in
Grade 9.
Example 1.1.2. Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equation in each item. Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
11
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(1) x2 + y 2 6x = 7
(2) x2 + y 2 14x + 2y = 14
PY
x2 6x + y 2 = 7
x2 6x + 9 + y 2 = 7 + 9
(x 3)2 + y 2 = 16
Teaching Notes
A common mistake
committed by
students is to add 9
and 25
only. They
16
EP
E
(3)
C
O
x2 14x + y 2 + 2y = 14
x2 14x + 49 + y 2 + 2y + 1 = 14 + 49 + 1
(x 7)2 + (y + 1)2 = 36
Figure 1.10
Figure 1.11
Figure 1.12
12
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
13
2
C
O
15
2
PY
(1) x2 + y 2 5x + 4y = 46
Answer: center 25 , 2 , radius
Figure 1.14
EP
E
Figure 1.13
? Example 1.1.3. A street with two lanes, each 10 ft wide, goes through a
semicircular tunnel with radius 12 ft. How high is the tunnel at the edge of each
lane? Round off to 2 decimal places.
13
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We draw a coordinate system with origin at the middle of the highway,
as shown. Because of the given radius, the tunnels boundary is on the circle
x2 + y 2 = 122 . Point P is the point on the arc just above the edge of a lane, so
its x-coordinate is 10. Weneed its y-coordinate. We then solve 102 + y 2 = 122
for y > 0, giving us y = 2 11 6.63 ft.
2
PY
C
O
EP
E
Teaching Notes
A perpendicular
bisector of a
segment is the line
that passes
through the
midpoint of the
segment and is
perpendicular to
the segment.
Figure 1.15
Figure 1.16
Solution. We first determine the center. It is the intersection of the perpendicular
14
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
bisectors of AB and BC (see Figure 1.16). Recall that, in a circle, the perpendicular bisector of any
the center. Since the midpoint M
chord passes through40
7+1 0+4
of AB is
, 2 = (3, 2), and mAB = 1+7 = 12 , the perpendicular bisector
2
of AB has equation y 2 = 2(x + 3), or equivalently, y = 2x 4.
= (4, 3), and mBC = 24
, 4+2
= 31 ,
Since the midpoint N of BC is 1+7
2
2
71
the perpendicular bisector of BC has equation y 3 = 3(x 4), or equivalently,
y = 3x 9.
PY
C
O
EP
E
Exercises 1.1
2. An archeologist found the remains of an ancient wheel, which she then placed
on a grid. If an arc of the wheel passes through A(7, 0), B(3, 4) and C(7, 0),
locate the center of the wheel, and the standard equation of the circle defining
its boundary.
Answer: (0, 3), x2 + (y + 3)2 = 58
1. Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equation in each
item. Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
(a) x2 + y 2 = 49
169
16
(b) 4x2 + 4y 2 = 25
2
2
(c) x 47 + y + 43 =
(e) x2 + y 2 + 8x 9y = 6
13
2
Answer: center 73 , 14
,
r
=
2
5
3
Answer: center 25 , 21 , r = 10
15
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(b)
EP
E
C
O
(a)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(c)
16
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(h)
EP
E
C
O
(g)
(i)
(j)
2. Find the standard equation of the circle which satisfies the given conditions.
Teaching Notes
To determine the
equation of a
circle, we just need
to determine the
center and the
radius.
Solution. The radius is the distance from the center to (9, 4):
p
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(h) center in the third quadrant, tangent to both the x-axis and y-axis,
radius 7
Answer: (x + 7)2 + (y + 7)2 = 49
(i) a diameter with endpoints (9, 2) and (15, 12)
Answer: (x 3)2 + (y 7)2 = 169
C
O
Solution. Two circles are said to be concentric if they have the same
center.
The standard equation of the given circle is
2
(x + 1) + (y 2)2 = 10. Thus, the circle were looking for has center
(1, 2) and radius 7.
EP
E
Its radius is 5, so its area is 25 sq. units. The circle we are looking
for should have area 100 sq. units, so its radius is 10.
Teaching Notes
The radius drawn
to a point on the
circle is
perpendicular to
the line tangent to
the circle at that
point.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
Solution. Since the epicenter is 6 units away from (0, 3), it could be any
of the points of a circle with center (0, 3) and radius 6. The equation is
then x2 + (y + 3)2 = 62 . Next, we solve thisequation for x if y = 2, and we
get x2 = 62 (2 + 3)2 = 11, and so x = 11 3.32.
4. A ferris wheel is elevated 1 m above ground. When a car reaches the highest
point on the ferris wheel, its altitude from ground level is 31 m. How far
away from the center, horizontally, is the car when it is at an altitude of
25 m?
Answer: 12 m
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
EP
E
Solution. We put two lines corresponding to the x-axis and y-axis, as shown,
with the origin coinciding with the midpoint of the windows base. This
origin is the center of the circle containing the arc. The equation of the circle
is then x2 + y 2 = 16. Let n be length of the base
AD, so thenside
2 AD
has
n 3n
3n 2
3
length 4 n. Point B then has coordinates 2 , 4 . Therefore, 2 + 4 =
16. Solving this for n > 0 yields n = 1613 . The base is then n 4.44 ft and
the side 34 n 3.33 ft.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of a parabola
(2) Derivation of the standard equation of a parabola
(3) Graphing parabolas
(4) Solving situational problems involving parabolas
Introduction
PY
A parabola is one of the conic sections. We have already seen parabolas which
open upward or downward, as graphs of quadratic functions. Here, we will see
parabolas opening to the left or right. Applications of parabolas are presented
at the end.
C
O
Consider the point F (0, 2) and the line ` having equation y = 2, as shown in
Figure 1.17. What are the distances of A(4, 2) from F and from `? (The latter
is taken as the distance of A from A` , the point on ` closest to A). How about
the distances of B(8, 8) from F and from ` (from B` )?
AF = 4
AA` = 4
p
(8 0)2 + (8 2)2 = 10
BF =
and
and
BB` = 10
EP
E
There are other points P such that P F = P P` (where P` is the closest point on
line `). The collection of all such points forms a shape called a parabola.
Figure 1.17
Figure 1.18
Let F be a given point, and ` a given line not containing F . The set of
all points P such that its distances from F and from ` are the same, is
called a parabola. The point F is its focus and the line ` its directrix.
21
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
x2 + (y c)2 = y (c) = y + c
x2 + y 2 2cy + c2 = y 2 + 2cy + c2
x2 = 4cy
The vertex V is the point midway between the focus and the directrix. This
equation, x2 = 4cy, is then the standard equation of a parabola opening upward
with vertex V (0, 0).
C
O
EP
E
We collect here the features of the graph of a parabola with standard equation
x2 = 4cy or x2 = 4cy, where c > 0.
Any point on the parabola has the same distance from the focus as it
has from the directrix.
(4) axis of symmetry: x = 0 (the y-axis)
This line divides the parabola into two parts which are mirror images
of each other.
PY
Example 1.2.1. Determine the focus and directrix of the parabola with the
given equation. Sketch the graph, and indicate the focus, directrix, vertex, and
axis of symmetry.
(1) x2 = 12y
(2) x2 = 6y
EP
E
C
O
Solution. (1) The vertex is V (0, 0) and the parabola opens upward. From 4c =
12, c = 3. The focus, c = 3 units above the vertex, is F (0, 3). The directrix,
3 units below the vertex, is y = 3. The axis of symmetry is x = 0.
23
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 1.2.2. What is the standard equation of the parabola in Figure 1.17?
Solution. From the figure, we deduce that c = 2. The equation is thus x2 =
8y.
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.2.1
EP
E
C
O
PY
1. Give the focus and directrix of the parabola with equation x2 = 10y. Sketch
the graph, and indicate
the focus, directrix, vertex, and axis of symmetry.
Answer: focus 0, 25 , directrix y = 25
2. Find the standard equation of the parabola with focus F (0, 3.5) and directrix
y = 3.5.
Answer: x2 = 14y
1.2.2. More Properties of Parabolas
The parabolas we considered so far are vertical and have their vertices at the
origin. Some parabolas open instead horizontally (to the left or right), and some
have vertices not at the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given
in the box. The corresponding computations are more involved, but are similar
to the one above, and so are not shown anymore.
In all four cases below, we assume that c > 0. The vertex is V (h, k), and it
lies between the focus F and the directrix `. The focus F is c units away from
the vertex V , and the directrix is c units away from the vertex. Recall that, for
any point on the parabola, its distance from the focus is the same as its distance
from the directrix.
24
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(y k)2 = 4c(x h)
C
O
(x h)2 = 4c(y k)
(y k)2 = 4c(x h)
directrix `: horizontal
directrix `: vertical
EP
E
(x h)2 = 4c(y k)
C
O
PY
Teaching Notes
In finding the
equation of a
parabola, we just
need to determine
the vertex and the
value of c.
Example 1.2.3. The figure shows the graph of parabola, with only its focus and
vertex indicated. Find its standard equation. What is its directrix and its axis
of symmetry?
EP
E
Solution. The vertex is V (5, 4) and the focus is F (3, 4). From these, we
deduce the following: h = 5, k = 4, c = 2 (the distance of the focus from the
vertex). Since the parabola opens to the left, we use the template (y k)2 =
4c(x h). Our equation is
(y + 4)2 = 8(x 5).
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. (1) We complete the square on y, and move x to the other side.
y 2 + 12y = 5x 16
y 2 + 12y + 36 = 5x 16 + 36 = 5x + 20
(y + 6)2 = 5(x + 4)
EP
E
C
O
PY
The parabola opens to the right. It has vertex V (4, 6). From 4c = 5, we
get c = 45 = 1.25. The focus is c = 1.25 units to the right of V : F (2.75, 6).
The (vertical) directrix is c = 1.25 units to the left of V : x = 5.25. The
(horizontal) axis is through V : y = 6.
In the last line, we divided by 5 for the squared part not to have any coefficient. The parabola opens downward. It has vertex V (3, 4).
From 4c = 24
, we get c = 65 = 1.2. The focus is c = 1.2 units below V :
5
F (3, 2.8). The (horizontal) directrix is c = 1.2 units above V : y = 5.2. The
(vertical) axis is through V : x = 3.
27
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Example 1.2.5. A parabola has focus F (7, 9) and directrix y = 3. Find its
standard equation.
C
O
Solution. The directrix is horizontal, and the focus is above it. The parabola
then opens upward and its standard equation has the form (x h)2 = 4c(y k).
Since the distance from the focus to the directrix is 2c = 9 3 = 6, then c = 3.
Thus, the vertex is V (7, 6), the point 3 units below F . The standard equation is
then (x 7)2 = 12(y 6).
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.2.2
EP
E
1. Determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry of the parabola
with equation x2 6x + 5y = 34. Sketch the graph, and include these points
and lines.
Answer: vertex (3, 5), focus (3, 6.25), directrix y = 3.75, axis x = 3
28
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
C
O
PY
Example 1.2.6. A satellite dish has a shape called a paraboloid, where each
cross-section is a parabola. Since radio signals (parallel to the axis) will bounce
off the surface of the dish to the focus, the receiver should be placed at the focus.
How far should the receiver be from the vertex, if the dish is 12 ft across, and 4.5
ft deep at the vertex?
Solution. The second figure above shows a cross-section of the satellite dish drawn
on a rectangular coordinate system, with the vertex at the origin. From the
problem, we deduce that (6, 4.5) is a point on the parabola. We need the distance
of the focus from the vertex, i.e., the value of c in x2 = 4cy.
x2 = 4cy
62 = 4c(4.5)
62
c=
=2
4 4.5
29
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Solution. Refer to the figure above, where the parabolic cable is drawn with
its vertex on the y-axis 30 ft above the origin. We may write its equation as
(x 0)2 = a(y 30); since we dont need the focal distance, we use the simpler
variable a in place of 4c. Since the towers are 150 ft high and 400 ft apart, we
deduce from the figure that (200, 150) is a point on the parabola.
x2 = a(y 30)
2002 = a(150 30)
1000
2002
=
a=
120
3
EP
E
Thus, the cable is 97.5 ft high 50 ft away from either tower. (As expected, we
get the same answer from x = 150.)
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.2.3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) x2 = 4y
(d) x2 + 6x + 8y = 7
(b) 3y 2 = 24x
2
(c) y + 52 = 5 x 92
(e) y 2 12x + 8y = 40
Answer:
Vertex
Focus
Directrix
Axis of Symmetry
(a)
(0, 0)
(0, 1)
y=1
x=0
(b)
(0, 0)
(2, 0)
x = 2
y=0
(c)
(4.5, 2.5)
(3.25, 2.5)
x = 5.75
y = 2.5
(d)
(3, 2)
(3, 0)
y=4
x = 3
(e)
(2, 4)
(5, 4)
x = 1
y = 4
(f)
(2.25, 1.25)
(2.25, 3)
y = 0.5
x = 2.25
EP
E
C
O
PY
Item
(b)
(c)
(e)
(f)
(a)
(d)
2. Find the standard equation of the parabola which satisfies the given conditions.
Answer: (y + 9)2 = 16(x 1)
Teaching Notes
It is helpful to
draw a diagram for
each item.
31
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(f) vertex (5, 7), vertical axis of symmetry, through the point P (7, 11)
Answer: (x + 5)2 = 8(y + 7)
PY
Solution. Since the axis is vertical and P is above the vertex, then the
parabola opens upward and has equation of the form (x + 5)2 = 4c(y + 7).
We plug the coordinates of P : (7 + 5)2 = 4c(11 + 7). We then get c = 2.
Thus, we have (x + 5)2 = 8(y + 7).
(g) vertex (5, 7), horizontal axis of symmetry, through the point P (7, 11)
Answer: (y + 7)2 = 27(x + 5)
C
O
Solution. Since the axis is horizontal and P is to the right of the vertex,
then the parabola opens to the right and has equation of the form (y +
7)2 = 4c(x + 5). We plug the coordinates of P : (11 + 7)2 = 4c(7 + 5).
We then get c = 6.75. Thus, we have (y + 7)2 = 27(x + 5).
3. A satellite dish shaped like a paraboloid, has diameter 2.4 ft and depth 0.9 ft.
If the receiver is placed at the focus, how far should the receiver be from the
vertex?
Answer: 0.4 ft
EP
E
4. If the diameter of the satellite dish from the previous problem is doubled, with
the depth kept the same, how far should the receiver be from the vertex?
Answer: 1.6 ft
? 5. A satellite dish is shaped like a paraboloid, with the receiver placed at the
focus. It is to have a depth of 0.44 m at the vertex, with the receiver placed
0.11 m away from the vertex. What should the diameter of the satellite dish
be?
Answer: 0.88 m
? 6. A flashlight is shaped like a paraboloid, so that if its light bulb is placed at
the focus, the light rays from the bulb will then bounce off the surface in a
focused direction that is parallel to the axis. If the paraboloid has a depth of
1.8 in and the diameter on its surface is 6 in, how far should the light source
be placed from the vertex?
Answer: 1.25 in
7. The towers supporting the cable of a suspension bridge are 1200 m apart and
170 m above the bridge it supports. Suppose the cable hangs, following the
shape of a parabola, with its lowest point 20 m above the bridge. How high is
the cable 120 m away from a tower?
Answer: 116 m
4
32
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Lesson Outline
Introduction
EP
E
Unlike circle and parabola, an ellipse is one of the conic sections that most students have not encountered formally before. Its shape is a bounded curve which
looks like a flattened circle. The orbits of the planets in our solar system around
the sun happen to be elliptical in shape. Also, just like parabolas, ellipses have
reflective properties that have been used in the construction of certain structures.
These applications and more will be encountered in this lesson.
Teaching Notes
You may review
the distance
formula.
There are other points P such that P F1 + P F2 = 10. The collection of all such
points forms a shape called an ellipse.
33
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 1.19
PY
Figure 1.20
C
O
Let F1 and F2 be two distinct points. The set of all points P , whose
distances from F1 and from F2 add up to a certain constant, is called
an ellipse. The points F1 and F2 are called the foci of the ellipse.
Given are two points on the x-axis, F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0), the foci, both c
units away from their center (0, 0). See Figure 1.20. Let P (x, y) be a point on
the ellipse. Let the common sum of the distances be 2a (the coefficient 2 will
make computations simpler). Thus, we have P F1 + P F2 = 2a.
EP
E
P F1 = 2a P F2
p
p
(x + c)2 + y 2 = 2a (x c)2 + y 2
p
x2 + 2cx + c2 + y 2 = 4a2 4a (x c)2 + y 2 + x2 2cx + c2 + y 2
p
a (x c)2 + y 2 = a2 cx
a2 x2 2cx + c2 + y 2 = a4 2a2 cx + c2 x2
(a2 c2 )x2 + a2 y 2 = a4 a2 c2 = a2 (a2 c2 )
b2 x 2 + a2 y 2 = a2 b2
by letting b = a2 c2 , so a > b
x2 y 2
+ 2 =1
a2
b
x2 y 2
+ 2 = 1, where a > b. Let c = a2 b2 .
2
a
b
34
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
For any point on the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 2a.
(3) vertices: V1 (a, 0) and V2 (a, 0)
The vertices are points on the ellipse, collinear with the center and foci.
If y = 0, then x = a. Each vertex is a units away from the center.
The segment V1 V2 is called the major axis. Its length is 2a. It divides
the ellipse into two congruent parts.
EP
E
The segment through the center, perpendicular to the major axis, is the
minor axis. It meets the ellipse at the covertices. It divides the ellipse
into two congruent parts.
If x = 0, then y = b. Each covertex is b units away from the center.
The minor axis W1 W2 is 2b units long. Since a > b, the major axis is
longer than the minor axis.
Example 1.3.1. Give the coordinates of the foci, vertices, and covertices of the
ellipse with equation
x2 y 2
+
= 1.
25
9
Sketch the graph, and include these points.
Solution. With a2 = 25 and b2 = 9, we have a = 5, b = 3, and c =
foci: F1 (4, 0), F2 (4, 0)
a2 b2 = 4.
PY
Example 1.3.2. Find the (standard) equation of the ellipse whose foci are
F1 (3, 0) and F2 (3, 0), such that for any point on it, the sum of its distances
from the foci is 10. See Figure 1.19.
a2 c2 = 4. The
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.3.1
C
O
EP
E
1. Give the coordinates of the foci, vertices, and covertices of the ellipse with
y2
x2
+
= 1. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
equation
169 25
Answer: foci: F1 (12, 0) and F2 (12, 0), vertices: V1 (13, 0) and V2 (13, 0),
covertices: W1 (0, 5) and W2 (0, 5)
2. Find the equation in standard form of the ellipse whose foci are F1 (8, 0) and
F2 (8, 0), such that for any point on it, the sum of its distances from the foci
x2
y2
is 20.
Answer:
+
=1
100 36
36
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(0, 0)
Corresponding Graphs
C
O
Center
x2 y 2
+ 2 = 1, b > a
b2
a
EP
E
x2 y 2
+ 2 = 1, a > b
a2
b
(h, k)
(x h)2 (y k)2
+
=1
a2
b2
a>b
(x h)2 (y k)2
+
=1
b2
a2
b>a
37
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In all four cases above, a > b and c = a2 b2 . The foci F1 and F2 are c
units away from the center. The vertices V1 and V2 are a units away from the
center, the major axis has length 2a, the covertices W1 and W2 are b units away
from the center, and the minor axis has length 2b. Recall that, for any point on
the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 2a.
In the standard equation, if the x-part has the bigger denominator, the ellipse
is horizontal. If the y-part has the bigger denominator, the ellipse is vertical.
Example 1.3.3. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and covertices
of the ellipse with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
(x + 3)2 (y 5)2
+
=1
24
49
(2) 9x2 + 16y 2 126x + 64y = 71
PY
(1)
center:
foci:
C
O
EP
E
covertices: W1 (3 2 6, 5) (7.9, 5)
W2 (3 + 2 6, 5) (1.9, 5)
38
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
foci:
(7, 2)
F1 (7 2 7, 2) (1.7, 2)
F2 (7 + 2 7, 2) (12.3, 2)
C
O
center:
PY
EP
E
covertices:
Example 1.3.4. The foci of an ellipse are (3, 6) and (3, 2). For any point
on the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 14. Find the standard
equation of the ellipse.
39
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. The midpoint (3, 2) of the foci is the center of the ellipse. The
ellipse is vertical (because the foci are vertically
aligned)and c = 4. From the
given sum, 2a = 14 so a = 7. Also, b = a2 c2 = 33. The equation is
(x + 3)2 (y + 2)2
+
= 1.
2
33
49
Example 1.3.5. An ellipse has vertices (2 61, 5) and (2 + 61, 5), and
its minor axis is 12 units long. Find its standard equation and its foci.
C
O
Seatwork/Homework 1.3.2
PY
Solution. The midpoint (2, 5)of the vertices is the center of the ellipse, which is
horizontal. Each vertex is a = 61 units away from the center. From the length of
(x 2)2 (y + 5)2
the minor axis, 2b = 12 so b = 6. The standard equation is
+
=
61
36
1. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and covertices of the ellipse
with equation 41x2 + 16y 2 + 246x 192y + 289 = 0. Sketch the graph, and
include these points.
EP
E
40
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. An ellipse has vertices (10, 4) and (6, 4), and covertices (2, 9) and
(2, 1). Find its standard equation and its foci.
(x + 2)2 (y + 4)2
+
= 1, foci (2 39, 4) and (2 + 39, 4)
Answer:
64
25
1.3.3. Situational Problems Involving Ellipses
Let us now apply the concept of ellipse to some situational problems.
EP
E
C
O
PY
62
n = 15 1 2
18
n = 10 2 14.14 ft
2
41
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
Example 1.3.7. The orbit of a planet has the shape of an ellipse, and on one
of the foci is the star around which it revolves. The planet is closest to the star
when it is at one vertex. It is farthest from the star when it is at the other vertex.
Suppose the closest and farthest distances of the planet from this star, are 420
million kilometers and 580 million kilometers, respectively. Find the equation of
the ellipse, in standard form, with center at the origin and the star at the x-axis.
Assume all units are in millions of kilometers.
EP
E
Solution. In the figure above, the orbit is drawn as a horizontal ellipse with
center at the origin. From the planets distances from the star, at its closest
and farthest points, it follows that the major axis is 2a = 420 + 580 = 1000
(million kilometers), so a = 500. If we place the star at the positive x-axis,
then it is c = 500 420 = 80 units away from the center. Therefore, we get
b2 = a2 c2 = 5002 802 = 243600. The equation then is
y2
x2
+
= 1.
250000 243600
The star could have been placed on the negative x-axis, and the answer would
still be the same.
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.3.3
? 1. The arch of a bridge is in the shape of a semiellipse, with its major axis at the
water level. Suppose the arch is 20 ft high in the middle, and 120 ft across its
major axis. How high above the water level is the arch, at a point 20 ft from
the center (horizontally)? Round off to 2 decimal places. Refer to Example
1.3.6.
Answer: 18.86 ft
42
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Exercises 1.3
1. Give the coordinates of the center, vertices, covertices, and foci of the ellipse
with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
y2
x2
+
=1
(a)
169 25
y2
x2
+
=1
(b)
144 169
(c) 4x2 + 13y 2 = 52
(x + 7)2 (y 4)2
+
=1
16
25
(e) 9x2 + 16y 2 + 72x 96y + 144 = 0
PY
(d)
Center
Vertices
Covertices
Foci
(a)
(0, 0)
(13, 0)
(0, 5)
(12, 0)
(b)
(0, 0)
(12, 0)
(0, 5)
(c)
(0, 0)
(0, 13)
( 13, 0)
(0, 2)
(3, 0)
(d)
(7, 4)
(7, 1)
(11, 4)
(7, 1)
(7, 9)
(3, 4)
(7, 7)
(4 7, 3)
EP
E
C
O
Item
(e)
(8, 3)
(4, 0)
(0, 3)
(4, 6)
(2 2 5, 3)
(2, 3)
(2, 9)
(2, 3)
(2, 3)
(2, 7)
(2, 1)
(f)
(4, 3)
(a)
(b)
(c)
43
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d)
(e)
(f)
PY
2. Find the standard equation of the ellipse which satisfies the given conditions.
EP
E
C
O
(a) foci (7, 6) and (1, 6), the sum of the distances of any point from the
(x + 4)2 (y 6)2
foci is 14
Answer:
+
=1
49
40
(b) center (5, 3), horizontal major axis of length 20, minor axis of length 16
(x 5)2 (y 3)2
+
=1
Answer:
100
64
(c) major axis of length 22, foci 9 units above and below the center (2, 4)
(x 2)2 (y 4)2
+
=1
Answer:
40
121
(d) covertices (4, 8) and (10, 8), a focus at (3, 12)
(x 3)2 (y 8)2
Answer:
+
=1
49
65
Solution. The midpoint of the covertices is the center, (3, 8). From this
point, the given focus is c = 4 units away. Since b = 7 (the distance from
the center to a covertex), then a2 = b2 + c2 = 65. The ellipse then has
(x 3)2 (y 8)2
+
= 1.
equation
49
65
(e) focus (6, 2), covertex (1, 5), horizontal major axis
(x + 1)2 (y + 2)2
Answer:
+
=1
74
49
Solution. Make a rough sketch of the points to see that the center is to
the right of the given focus, and below the given covertex. The center is
thus (1, 2). It follows that c = 5, b = 7, so a2 = b2 + c2 = 74. The
(x + 1)2 (y + 2)2
ellipse then has equation
+
= 1.
74
49
44
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. A truck that is about to pass through the tunnel from the previous item is 10
ft wide and 8.3 ft high. Will this truck be able to pass through the tunnel?
Answer: Yes
5. An orbit of a satellite around a planet is an ellipse, with the planet at one
focus of this ellipse. The distance of the satellite from this star varies from
300, 000 km to 500, 000 km, attained when the satellite is at each of the two
vertices. Find the equation of this ellipse, if its center is at the origin, and the
vertices are on the x-axis. Assume all units are in 100, 000 km.
Answer:
x2
16
y2
15
=1
x2
640,000
PY
y2
C
O
= 1, where the star is at one focus, and all units are in millions of
630,000
kilometers. The planet is closest and farthest from the star, when it is at the
vertices. How far is the planet when it is closest to the sun? How far is the
planet when it is farthest from the sun?
Answer: 700 million km, 900 million km
EP
E
Solution. The ellipse has center at the origin, and major axis on the x-axis.
Since a2 = 640, 000, then a = 800, so
the verticesare V1 (800, 0) and
2
V2 (800, 00). Since b = 630, 000, then c = a2 b2 = 10, 000 = 100. Suppose the star is at the focus at the right of the origin (this choice is arbitrary,
since we could have chosen instead the focus on the left). Its location is then
F (100, 0). The closest distance is then V2 F = 700 (million kilometers) and
the farthest distance is V1 F = 900 (million kilometers).
45
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We could put a coordinate system with the floor of the room on
the x-axis, and the center of the room at the origin, as shown in the figures.
The major axis has length 34, and the height of the room is half of the minor
y2
x2
axis. The ellipse that contains the ceiling then has equation 17
2 + 82 = 1. The
C
O
PY
Solution. As in the previous problem, put a coordinate system with the floor
of the room on the x-axis, and the center of the room at the origin. The major
axis has length 30, and half the minor axis is 9. The ellipse that contains the
y2
x2
ceiling then has equation 15
2 + 92 = 1. The distance of a focus from the center
EP
E
46
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Introduction
Just like ellipse, a hyperbola is one of the conic sections that most students
have not encountered formally before. Its graph consists of two unbounded
branches which extend in opposite directions. It is a misconception that each
branch is a parabola. This is not true, as parabolas and hyperbolas have very
different features. An application of hyperbolas in basic location and navigation
schemes are presented in an example and some exercises.
1.4.1. Definition and Equation of a Hyperbola
PY
Consider the points F1 (5, 0) and F2 (5, 0) as shown in Figure 1.21. What is the
absolute value of the difference of the distances of A(3.75, 3) from F1 and from
F2 ? How about the absolute value of the difference of the distances of B 5, 16
3
from F1 and from F2 ?
C
O
EP
E
There are other points P such that |P F1 P F2 | = 6. The collection of all such
points forms a shape called a hyperbola, which consists of two disjoint branches.
For points P on the left branch, P F2 P F1 = 6; for those on the right branch,
P F1 P F2 = 6.
Figure 1.21
Figure 1.22
Let F1 and F2 be two distinct points. The set of all points P , whose
distances from F1 and from F2 differ by a certain constant, is called a
hyperbola. The points F1 and F2 are called the foci of the hyperbola.
In Figure 1.22, given are two points on the x-axis, F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0), the
foci, both c units away from their midpoint (0, 0). This midpoint is the center
47
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 1.24
PY
Figure 1.23
C
O
of the hyperbola. Let P (x, y) be a point on the hyperbola, and let the absolute
value of the difference of the distances of P from F1 and F2 , be 2a (the coefficient
2 will make computations simpler). Thus, |P F1 P F2 | = 2a, and so
p
p
2
2
2
2
(x + c) + y (x c) + y = 2a.
Algebraic manipulations allow us to rewrite this into the much simpler
where b =
c2 a2 .
x2 y 2
2 = 1,
a2
b
Teaching Notes
If it is assumed
that P is closer to
F1 , then the same
equation will be
obtained because
of symmetry.
EP
E
by letting b =
c2 a2 > 0
48
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
We collect here the features of the graph of a hyperbola with standard equation
x2 y 2
2 = 1.
a2
b
2
2
Let c = a + b .
(1) center : origin (0, 0)
(2) foci : F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0)
Each focus is c units away from the center.
PY
For any point on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of
its distances from the foci is 2a.
(3) vertices: V1 (a, 0) and V2 (a, 0)
C
O
The vertices are points on the hyperbola, collinear with the center and
foci.
If y = 0, then x = a. Each vertex is a units away from the center.
The segment V1 V2 is called the transverse axis. Its length is 2a.
EP
E
The asymptotes of the hyperbola are two lines passing through the center which serve as a guide in graphing the hyperbola: each branch of
the hyperbola gets closer and closer to the asymptotes, in the direction
towards which the branch extends. (We need the concept of limits from
calculus to explain this.)
An aid in determining the equations of the asymptotes: in the standard
2
2
equation, replace 1 by 0, and in the resulting equation xa2 yb2 = 0, solve
for y.
Example 1.4.1. Determine the foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola
with equation
x2 y 2
= 1.
9
7
Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate
axes, and the auxiliary rectangle.
49
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2
2
Solution. With
a = 9 and
b = 7, we have
a = 3, b = 7, and c = a2 + b2 = 4.
foci: F1 (4, 0) and F2 (4, 0)
asymptotes: y = 37 x and y = 37 x
The graph is shown at the right. The conju
gate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 7
2.7 units above and below the center.
2
PY
Example 1.4.2. Find the (standard) equation of the hyperbola whose foci are
F1 (5, 0) and F2 (5, 0), such that for any point on it, the absolute value of the
difference of its distances from the foci is 6. See Figure 1.21.
Seatwork/Homework 1.4.1
c2 a2 = 4. The
2
C
O
= 1.
9
16
EP
E
y2
x2
= 1.
16 20
Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines, along with the auxiliary
rectangle.
Answer: foci
F1 (6, 0) and
F2 (6, 0), vertices V1 (4, 0) and V2 (4, 0), asymp
5
5
totes y = 2 x and y = 2 x
and F2 (4 2, 0), such that for any point on it, the absolute value of the
x2
y2
difference of its distances from the foci is 8.
Answer:
=1
16 16
50
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(0, 0)
C
O
PY
Center
y 2 x2
2 =1
a2
b
EP
E
x2 y 2
2 =1
a2
b
(h, k)
(x h)2 (y k)2
=1
a2
b2
(y k)2 (x h)2
=1
a2
b2
51
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
In all four cases above, we let c = a2 + b2 . The foci F1 and F2 are c units
away from the center C. The vertices V1 and V2 are a units away from the center.
The transverse axis V1 V2 has length 2a. The conjugate axis has length 2b and is
perpendicular to the transverse axis. The transverse and conjugate axes bisect
each other at their intersection point, C. Each branch of a hyperbola gets closer
and closer to the asymptotes, in the direction towards which the branch extends.
The equations of the asymptotes can be determined by replacing 1 in the standard
equation by 0. The asymptotes can be drawn as the extended diagonals of the
auxiliary rectangle determined by the transverse and conjugate axes. Recall that,
for any point on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its distances
from the foci is 2a.
C
O
In the standard equation, aside from being positive, there are no other restrictions on a and b. In fact, a and b can even be equal. The orientation of the
hyperbola is determined by the variable appearing in the first term (the positive
term): the corresponding axis is where the two branches will open. For example,
if the variable in the first term is x, the hyperbola is horizontal: the transverse
axis is horizontal, and the branches open to the left and right in the direction of
the x-axis.
Example 1.4.3. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include
these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate axes, and the auxiliary rectangle.
(y + 2)2 (x 7)2
=1
25
9
(2) 4x2 5y 2 + 32x + 30y = 1
EP
E
(1)
2
2
Solution.
(1) From
a = 25 and b = 9, we have a = 5, b = 3, and c =
center: C(7, 2)
foci: F1 (7, 2
41
3
and y = 35 x +
29
3
The conjugate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 3 units to the left and right
of the center.
52
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
=1
5
4
asymptotes: y =
2 x
5
8
5
+ 3 and y = 25 x
8
5
+3
The conjugate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 2 units above and below
the center.
53
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
Example 1.4.4. The foci of a hyperbola are (5, 3) and (9, 3). For any point
on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its of its distances from
the foci is 10. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola.
Solution. The midpoint (2, 3) of the foci is the center of the hyperbola. Each
focus is c = 7 units away from the center. From the given difference, 2a = 10 so
a = 5. Also, b2 = c2 a2 = 24. The hyperbola is horizontal (because the foci are
horizontally aligned), so the equation is
2
(x 2)2 (y + 3)2
= 1.
25
24
Example 1.4.5.
A hyperbola has vertices (4, 5) and (4, 9), and one of its
foci is (4, 2 65). Find its standard equation.
Solution. The midpoint (4, 2) of the vertices is the center of the hyperbola,
which is vertical (because the vertices are vertically aligned).
Each vertex is
a = 7 units away from the center. The given focus is c = 65 units away from
the center. Thus, b2 = c2 a2 = 16, and the standard equation is
(y 2)2 (x + 4)2
= 1.
49
16
54
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 1.4.2
EP
E
C
O
PY
1. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola with equation 9x2 4y 2 90x 32y = 305. Sketch the graph, and
include these points and lines, along with the auxiliary rectangle.
Answer: center C(5, 4), foci F1 (5, 42 13) and F2 (5, 4+2 13), vertices
V1 (5, 10) and V2 (5, 2), asymptotes y = 32 x + 72 and y = 23 x 23
2
2. A hyperbola has vertices (1, 9) and (13, 9), and one of its foci is (2, 9). Find
(x 7)2 (y 9)2
its standard equation.
Answer:
=1
36
45
PY
Seatwork/Homework 1.4.3
C
O
EP
E
? 1. Two stations, located at M (1.5, 0) and N (1.5, 0) (units are in km), simultaneously send sound signals to a ship, with the signal traveling at the speed of
0.33 km/s. If the signal from N was received by the ship four seconds before
the signal it received from M , find the equation of the curve containing the
y2
x2
possible location of the ship.
Answer: 0.4356
1.8144
= 1 (right branch)
Exercises 1.4
1. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and the asymptotes of the
hyperbola with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points
and lines.
x2
y2
=1
36 64
y2
x2
(b)
=1
25 16
(c) (x 1)2 y 2 = 4
(a)
(y + 2)2 (x + 3)2
=1
15
10
(e) 3x2 2y 2 42x 16y = 67
(d)
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
Item
Center
Vertices
Foci
(a)
(0, 0)
(6, 0)
(b)
(0, 0)
(0, 5)
(c)
(1, 0)
(d)
(3, 2)
(3, 2 15)
(10, 0)
(0, 41)
(1 2 2, 0)
(e)
(7, 4)
(f)
(3, 5)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(e)
y = 34 x
y = 54 x
y = x 1, y = x + 1
q
q
y = 32 x 3 32 2
q
q
3
y = 2 x 7 32 4
y = 539 x
15
39
+5
EP
E
(f)
PY
Asymptotes
(d)
C
O
Item
(7 2 10, 4)
(a)
(b)
57
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(d)
C
O
(c)
EP
E
(e)
(f)
2. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola which satisfies the given conditions.
(a) foci (4, 3) and (4, 13), the absolute value of the difference of the
distances of any point from the foci is 14
(y 5)2 (x + 4)2
=1
Answer:
49
15
(b) vertices (2, 8) and (8, 8), a focus (12, 8)
(x 3)2 (y 8)2
Answer:
=1
25
56
(c) center (6, 9), a vertex (6, 15), conjugate axis of length 12
(y 9)2 (x + 6)2
Answer:
=1
25
36
(d) asymptotes y = 34 x + 13 and y = 43 x + 41
, a vertex (1, 7)
3
(x 5)2 (y 7)2
Answer:
=1
36
64
Solution. The asymptotes intersect at (5, 7). This is the center. The
distance of the given vertex from the center is a = 6. This vertex and
center are aligned horizontally, so the hyperbola has equation of the form
2
(xh)2
(yk)
= 1. The asymptotes consequently have the form y k =
a2
b2
58
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
b
a
= 43 .
(x 5)2 (y 7)2
= 1.
36
64
and y = 31 x + 37 , a focus (1, 12)
(y 2)2 (x 1)2
Answer:
=1
10
90
Solution. The asymptotes intersect at (1, 2). This is the center. The
distance of the given focus from the center is c = 10. This focus and
center are aligned vertically, so the hyperbola has equation of the form
2
(yk)2
(xh)
= 1. The asymptotes consequently have the form y k =
a2
b2
a
b (x h), and thus, have slopes ab . From the given asymptotes, ab = 13 ,
so b = 3a.
c2 = 100 = a2 + b2 = a2 + (3a)2 = 10a2
5
3
PY
(e) asymptotes y = 31 x +
C
O
= 1.
10
90
EP
E
3. Two control towers are located at points Q(500, 0) and R(500, 0), on a
straight shore where the x-axis runs through (all distances are in meters).
At the same moment, both towers sent a radio signal to a ship out at sea, each
traveling at 300 m/s. The ship received the signal from Q 3 s (microseconds)
before the message from R.
(a) Find the equation of the curve containing the possible location of the
y2
x2
= 1 (left branch)
ship.
Answer:
202500 47500
(b) Find the coordinates (rounded off to two decimal places) of the ship if it
is 200 m from the shore (y = 200).
Answer: (610.76, 200)
Solution. Since the time delay between the two signals is 3 s, then the difference between the distances traveled by the two signals is 300 3 = 900 m. The
ship is then on a hyperbola, consisting of points whose distances from Q and R
(the foci) differ by 2a = 900. With a = 450 and c = 500 (the distance of each
focus from the center, the origin), we have b2 = c2 a2 = 5002 4502 = 47500.
y2
x2
Since a2 = 202500, the hyperbola then has equation 202500
47500
= 1. Since
the signal from Q was received first, the ship is closer to Q than R, so the
ship is on the left branch of this hyperbola. Using y = 200, we then solve
x2
2002
47500
= 1 for x < 0 (left branch), and we get x 610.76.
202500
59
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Lesson Outline
Introduction
C
O
In this lesson, we will identify the conic section from a given equation. We
will analyze the properties of the identified conic section. We will also look at
problems that use the properties of the different conic sections. This will allow
us to synthesize what has been covered so far.
EP
E
that is, the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are the same. However, it does not follow
that if the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are the same, the graph is a circle.
General Equation
Standard Equation
graph
1 2
3 2
2
2
2x + 2y 2x + 6y + 5 = 0 x 2 + y + 2 = 0
point
2
2
2
2
x + y 6x 8y + 50 = 0 (x 3) + (y 4) = 25 empty set
(A)
(B)
In (B), no real values of x and y can make the nonnegative left side equal to
the negative right side. The graph is then the empty set.
60
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let us recall the general form of the equations of the other conic sections. We
may write the equations of conic sections we discussed in the general form
Ax2 + By 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0.
Some terms may vanish, depending on the kind of conic section.
(1) Circle: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients are the same
Ax2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0
Example: 18x2 + 18y 2 24x + 48y 5 = 0
(2) Parabola: exactly one of x2 or y 2 appears
PY
C
O
(3) Ellipse: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients A and B have the same
sign and are unequal
EP
E
(4) Hyperbola: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients A and B have different signs
The following examples will show the possible degenerate conic (a point, two
intersecting lines, or the empty set) as the graph of an equation following a similar
pattern as the non-degenerate cases.
(1) 4x2 + 9y 2 16x + 18y + 25 = 0
=
=
=
=
(x 2)2 (y + 1)2
+
=0
32
22
one point: (2, 1)
(x 2)2 (y + 1)2
+
= 1
32
22
empty set
61
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
=
=
(x 2)2 (y + 1)2
=0
32
22
2
two lines: y + 1 = (x 2)
3
PY
Seatwork/Homework 1.5.1
C
O
The graphs of the following equations are (nondegenerate) conic sections. Identify
the conic section.
(4) 3x + 6x + 4y = 18
EP
E
Answer: hyperbola
Answer: parabola
Answer: circle
Answer: parabola
Answer: ellipse
Answer: hyperbola
Example 1.5.1. A circle has center at the focus of the parabola y 2 + 16x + 4y =
44, and is tangent to the directrix of this parabola. Find its standard equation.
Solution. The standard equation of the parabola is (y + 2)2 = 16(x 3). Its
vertex is V (3, 2). Since 4c = 16 or c = 4, its focus is F (1, 2) and its directrix
is x = 7. The circle has center at (1, 2) and radius 8, which is the distance
from F to the directrix. Thus, the equation of the circle is
(x + 1)2 + (y + 2)2 = 64.
Example 1.5.2. The vertices and foci of 5x2 4y 2 + 50x + 16y + 29 = 0 are,
respectively, the foci and vertices of an ellipse. Find the standard equation of
this ellipse.
62
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
= 1.
16
20
For this hyperbola, using the notations ah , bh , and ch to refer to a, b, and
c of
the standard
equation of the hyperbola, respectively, we have ah = 4, bh = 2 5,
p
2
2
ch = ah + bh = 6, so we have the following points:
center: (5, 2)
PY
C
O
(x + 5)2 (y 2)2
+
= 1.
36
20
Seatwork/Homework 1.5.2
EP
E
1. Find the standard equation of all circles having center at a focus of 21x2
4y 2 + 84x 24y = 36 and passing through the farther vertex.
2. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola one branch of which has focus and
vertex that are the same as those of x2 6x + 8y = 23, and whose conjugate
axis is on the directrix of the same parabola.
(y 6)2 (x 3)2
Answer:
=1
4
12
Exercises 1.5
1. The graphs of the following equations are non-degenerate conic sections. Identify the conic section.
(a) 5x2 + 7y 2 40x 28y = 73
Answer: ellipse
(b) 5y + 2x 30y = 49
Answer: parabola
Answer: hyperbola
Answer: circle
63
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: parabola
2. The graphs of the following equations are degenerate conic sections. What are
the specific graphs?
(a) x2 + 3y 2 4x + 24y = 52
Answer: lines: y + 2 = 32 (x + 1)
PY
3. An ellipse has equation 25x2 + 16y 2 + 150x 32y = 159. Find the standard
equations of all parabolas whose vertex is a focus of this ellipse and whose
focus is a vertex of this ellipse.
Answer: (x + 3)2 = 8(y + 2), (x + 3)2 = 32(y + 2), (x + 3)2 = 32(y 4),
and (x + 3)2 = 8(y 4)
C
O
(x + 3)2 (y 1)2
+
= 1.
16
25
focus
focal distance
standard equation
Q(3, 2) P (3, 4)
(x + 3)2 = 8(y + 2)
Q(3, 2)
S(3, 6)
(x + 3)2 = 32(y + 2)
R(3, 4)
P (3, 4)
(x + 3)2 = 32(y 4)
R(3, 4)
S(3, 6)
EP
E
vertex
Its center is (3, 1). Since a = 5 and b = 4, we get c = 3, so the vertices are
P (3, 4) and S(3, 6), while its foci are Q(3, 2) and R(3, 4). We then
get four parabolas satisfying the conditions of the problem. The focal distance
indicated below is the distance from the vertex to the focus.
(x + 3)2 = 8(y 4)
4. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola whose conjugate axis is on the
directrix of the parabola y 2 + 12x + 6y = 39, having the focus of the parabola
as one of its foci, and the vertex of the parabola as one of its vertices.
(x 7)2 (y + 3)2
Answer:
=1
9
27
Solution. The standard equation of the parabola is (y + 3)2 = 12(x 4), so
its vertex is V (4, 3), and it opens to the left. With 4c = 12, or c = 3, its
focus is F (1, 3), and its directrix is x = 7. The hyperbola has its center on
64
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x = 7, its conjugate axis, and a vertex at (4, 3). Its center is then C(7, 3).
The conjugate axis is vertical so the hyperbola is horizontal, with constants
ah = CV = 3 and ch = CF = 6, so b2h = c2h a2h = 27. The standard equation
of the required hyperbola is
(x 7)2 (y + 3)2
= 1.
9
27
PY
5. Find the standard equation of the parabola opening to the left whose axis
contains the major axis of the ellipse x2 + 4y 2 10x 24y + 45 = 0, whose
focus is the center of the ellipse, and which passes through the covertices of
this ellipse.
Answer: (y 3)2 = 4(x 6)
(x 5)2 (y 3)2
+
= 1.
16
4
C
O
Its center (5, 3) is the focus of the parabola. Since b = 2, its covertices are
W1 (5, 1) and W2 (5, 5). The vertex of the parabola, c units to the right of (5, 3),
is (5 + c, 3). Its equation can be written as (y 3)2 = 4c(x (5 + c)). Since
(5, 5) is a point on this parabola, we have (5 3)2 = 4c(5 (5 + c)). Solving
this equation for c > 0 yields c = 1. Therefore, the standard equation of the
required parabola is (y 3)2 = 4(x 6).
EP
E
6. Find the standard equation of the ellipse whose major and minor axes are the
transverse and conjugate axes (not necessarily in that order) of the hyperbola
(x 2)2 (y + 3)2
+
=1
4x2 9y 2 16x 54y = 29.
Answer:
9
4
Solution. The standard equation of the hyperbola is
(y + 3)2 (x 2)2
= 1,
4
9
with center (2, 3), and constants ah = 2 and bh = 3. Since its conjugate axis
(which is horizontal and has length 2bh = 6) is longer than its transverse axis
(length 2ah = 4), the ellipse is horizontal. Its major axis has length 2ae = 6
and its minor axis has length 2be = 4, so ae = 3 and be = 2. The ellipse shares
the same center as the hyperbola. Thus, the standard equation of the required
ellipse is
(x 2)2 (y + 3)2
+
= 1.
9
4
(a) a circle,
(b) a horizontal ellipse,
(c) a vertical ellipse,
(d) a hyperbola (is it horizontal or vertical?), or
(e) the empty set.
Answer: (a) m = 7, (b) 2 < m < 7, (c) m > 7, (d) 3 < m < 2 (horizontal),
(e) m < 3
PY
C
O
EP
E
= 1.
m + 3 4 2m
(e) The remaining case is when m < 3. In this case, m + 3 < 0 and
2m 4 < 0. This makes the expression
x2
y2
+
m + 3 2m 4
negative, and never equal to 1. The graph is then the empty set.
66
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
(2) Solving a system involving one linear and one quadratic equation
(3) Solving a system involving two quadratic equations
(4) Applications of systems of nonlinear equations
Introduction
EP
E
4x + y = 6
5x + 3y = 4
Teaching Notes
Recall that the
task of solving a
system of
equations is
equivalent to
finding points of
intersection.
Teaching Notes
Systems of linear
equations and
solving them were
introduced and
studied in Grade 8
at the last part of
Quarter I.
Solution. Isolate the variable y in the first equation, and then substitute into the
second equation.
67
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4x + y = 6
= y = 6 4x
PY
5x + 3y = 4
5x + 3(6 4x) = 4
7x + 18 = 4
x=2
y = 6 4(2) = 2
C
O
Example 1.6.2. Use the elimination method to solve the system, and sketch the
graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection.
2x + 7 = 3y
4x + 7y = 12
Solution. We eliminate first the variable x. Rewrite the first equation wherein
only the constant term is on the right-hand side of the equation, then multiply
it by 2, and then add the resulting equation to the second equation.
EP
E
2x 3y = 7
(2)(2x 3y) = (2)(7)
4x + 6y = 14
4x + 6y = 14
4x + 7y = 12
13y = 26
y=2
1
x=
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.1
Use either substitution or elimination method to solve the system, and sketch the
graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection.
x 3y = 5
1.
2x + 5y = 1
68
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
EP
E
5x + 3y = 4
2.
3x + 5y = 9
Answer: 21 , 32
PY
Answer: (2, 1)
xy+2=0
y 1 = x2
69
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We solve for y in terms of x in the first equation, and substitute this
expression to the second equation.
xy+2=0
Solutions:
y =x+2
1+ 5
1+ 5
5+ 5
x=
= y =
+2=
2
2
2
1 5
1 5
5 5
x=
= y =
+2=
2
2
2
!
1+ 5 5+ 5
,
and
2
2
PY
y 1 = x2
(x + 2) 1 = x2
x2 x 1 = 0
1 5
x=
2
1 5 5 5
,
2
2
EP
E
C
O
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.2
Solve each system, and sketch the graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the
point(s) of intersection.
x2 + y 2 = 16
1.
xy =4
70
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(y + 4)2 + y 2 = 16
y 2 + 8y + 16 + y 2 = 16
2y 2 + 8y = 0
y = 0 or y = 4
y = 0 = x = 4
and
y = 4 = x = 0
EP
E
C
O
PY
Teaching Notes
We substitute each
value of y (0 and
4) to the second
equation x y = 4
(or x = y + 4).
y = x2
2.
x = y2
x = (x2 )2
x4 x = 0
x(x3 1) = 0
x = 0 or x = 1
71
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x = 0 = y = 0
and
x = 1 = y = 1
C
O
PY
y 2 4x 6y = 11
y 2 + 4x 6y = 3
Teaching Notes
The variable y
could also be
eliminated first by
subtracting the
second equation
from the first.
EP
E
y 2 4x 6y = 11
4(3 x) = (y 3)2 .
and
y = 1 = x = 1
72
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
The graphs of the equations in the preceding example with the points of
intersection are shown below.
EP
E
Solution 2. By completing the square, we can change the first equation into standard form:
y 2 4x 6y = 11 = 4(x + 5) = (y 3)2 .
4(x + 5) = (y 3)2
4(3 x) = (y 3)2
(x 3)2 + (y 5)2 = 10
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 25.
73
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6x 12y + 48 = 0 = x + 2y 8 = 0
x = 8 2y.
PY
C
O
Teaching Notes
Because the
equation
x + 2y 8 = 0 is
obtained by
combining the two
equations (through
substraction), this
equation also
contains the
solutions of the
original system. In
fact, this is the line
passing through
the common points
of the two circles.
x2 + y 2 6x 10y + 24 = 0
x2 + y 2 + 2y 24 = 0.
y = 2 = x = 8 2(2) = 4
and
y = 4 = x = 8 2(4) = 0
EP
E
The graphs of both equations are circles. One has center (3, 5) and radius
10, while the other has center (0, 1) and radius 5. The graphs with the points
of intersection are show below.
74
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.3
Solve the system, and graph the curves in one Cartesian plane showing the
point(s) of intersection.
C
O
PY
x2 + y 2 = 25
1.
2
2
x +y =1
18 32
Answer: (3, 4), (3, 4), (3, 4), and (3, 4)
EP
E
x2 + 2y 12 = 0
2.
x2 + y 2 = 36
Answer: (0, 6), 2 5, 4 , and 2 5, 4
75
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(x 1)2 + (y 3)2 = 10
3.
x2 + (y 1)2 = 5
EP
E
C
O
PY
? Example 1.6.6. The screen size of television sets is given in inches. This
indicates the length of the diagonal. Screens of the same size can come in different
shapes. Wide-screen TVs usually have screens with aspect ratio 16 : 9, indicating
the ratio of the width to the height. Older TV models often have aspect ratio
4 : 3. A 40-inch LED TV has screen aspect ratio 16 : 9. Find the length and the
width of the screen.
Solution. Let w represent the width and h the height of the screen. Then, by
Pythagorean Theorem, we have the system
w2 + h2 = 402 = w2 + h2 = 1600
w = 16 = h = 9w
h
9
16
76
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
w + h = 1600 =
w +
9w
16
2
= 1600
337w2
= 1600
256
r
409 600
w=
34.86
337
h=
19(34.86)
19x
= 19.61
16
16
PY
Therefore, a 40-inch TV with aspect ratio 16 : 9 is about 35.86 inches wide and
19.61 inches high.
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.4
EP
E
C
O
Exercises 1.6
1. Solve the system, and graph the curves.
y = 2x + 4
(a)
y = 2x2
Answer: (1, 2) and (2, 8)
77
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
x2 + y 2 = 25
(b)
2x 3y = 6
EP
E
16
, 13
Answer: (3, 4) and 63
13
x2 + y 2 = 12
(c)
x2 y 2 = 4
Answer: 2 2, 2 , 2 2, 2 , 2 2, 2 , and 2 2, 2
78
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
x2 4y 2 = 200
(d)
x + 2y = 100
Answer: 51, 49
2
1 (x + 1)2 (y + 2)2 = 1
4
(e)
(y + 2)2 = 1 (x 1)
4
Answer: (1, 2), 4, 2 +
5
2
, and 4, 2
5
2
79
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? 2. A laptop has screen size 13 inches with aspect ratio 5 : 4. Find the length and
the width of the screen.
Answer: 10.15 in 8.12 in
? 3. What are the dimensions of a rectangle whose perimeter is 50 cm and diagonal
Answer: 14.9 cm 10.1 cm
18 cm?
2
Answer: a = 1 or a = 3
C
O
xy+a=0
PY
x2 + y 2 + 2x 1 = 0
EP
E
80
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Unit 2
EP
E
C
O
PY
Mathematical Induction
81
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Outline
(1) Sequences and series
PY
(2) Different types of sequences and series (Fibonacci sequence, arithmetic and
geometric sequence and series, and harmonic series)
Introduction
C
O
EP
E
Get students to suggest strategies they can use to solve this problem. Lead
or encourage them to try out smaller number of steps and find a pattern. Work
with the class to complete the following table (on the board):
82
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Number of Ways
to Climb the Stairs
5
..
.
8
..
.
PY
Number of Steps
in the Stairs
C
O
The students should be able to recognize the Fibonacci sequence. Ask the
students to recall what Fibonacci sequences are and where they had encountered
this sequence before.
Teaching Notes
This is equivalent
to the number of
ways to express a
number (number of
steps in the stairs)
as a sum of 1s and
2s. For example,
we can write 3 as a
sum of 1s and 2s
in three ways:
2 + 1, 1 + 2, and
1 + 1 + 1. In 2 + 1,
it means Jason
leaps 2 steps first,
then 1 step to
finish the
three-step stairs.
In this lesson, we will review the definitions and different types of sequences
and series.
Lesson Proper
EP
E
The sequence with nth term an is usually denoted by {an }, and the associated
series is given by
S = a1 + a2 + a3 + + an .
83
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 2.1.1. Determine the first five terms of each defined sequence, and
give their associated series.
(1) {2 n}
(3) {(1)n }
(2) {1 + 2n + 3n2 }
(4) {1 + 2 + 3 + + n}
PY
Associated series: S = a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5 = 1 + 0 1 2 3 = 5
(2) an = 1 + 2n + 3n2
C
O
(4) an = 1 + 2 + 3 + + n
EP
E
n(a1 + an )
n[2a1 + (n 1)d]
=
.
2
2
84
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
na1
if r = 1
n
Sn =
a1 (1 r )
if r =
6 1.
(1 r)
C
O
a1 + a1 r + a1 r2 + + a1 rn1 +
has a sum, and is given by
a1
.
1r
S=
EP
E
Teaching Notes
The proof of the
fact that the
infinite geometric
series
a1 + a1 r + has
a sum when |r| < 1
is beyond the scope
of Precalculus, and
can be found in
university
Calculus.
Seatwork/Homework
1. Write SEQ if the given item is a sequence, and write SER if it is a series.
Answer: SEQ
Answer: SEQ
(c) 1 + 1 1 + 1 1
Answer: SER
(a) 1, 2, 4, 8, . . .
(d)
1 2 3 4
, , , ,...
2 3 4 5
2
Answer: SEQ
(e) 1 + 2 + 2 + 23 + 24
Answer: SER
Answer: SER
Answer: A
85
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
,
4
1
,
3
1
,
5
Answer: O
1 1
, , 1 ,...
16 64 256
2 3 4
, , ,...
9 27 81
1 1 1 1
, , , ,...
9 13 17 21
Answer: G
Answer: O
Answer: A
Answer: F
Answer: O
Answer: G
PY
3. Determine the first five terms of each defined sequence, and give their associated series.
C
O
(a) {1 + n n2 }
Answer: a1 = 1, a2 = 1, a3 = 5, a4 = 11, a5 = 19
Associated series: 1 1 5 11 19 = 35
(b) {1 (1)n+1 }
Answer: a1 = 0, a2 = 2, a3 = 0, a4 = 2, a5 = 0
Associated series: 0 + 2 + 0 + 2 + 0 = 4
EP
E
(d) {1 2 3 n}
Answer: a1 = 1, a2 = 1 2 = 2, a3 = 1 2 3 = 6, a4 = 24, a5 = 120
Associated series: 1 + 2 + 6 + 24 + 120 = 153
4. Identify the series (and write NAGIG if it is not arithmetic, geometric, and
infinite geometric series), and determine the sum (and write NO SUM if it
cannot be summed up).
(a) 4 + 9 + 14 + + 64
(b) 81 + 27 + 9 + +
1
81
Answer: Geometric,
(c) 1 + 3 + 6 + 10 + 15 + 21 + + 55
(d) 10 2 + 6 + + 46
1
2
1
3
1
5
9841
81
1
7
+ + + +
10
11
86
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Lesson Outline
Introduction
C
O
The sigma notation is a shorthand for writing sums. In this lesson, we will
see the power of this notation in computing sums of numbers as well as algebraic
expressions.
EP
E
f (i),
Teaching Notes
Emphasize that
the value of i starts
at m, increases by
1, and ends at n.
i=m
87
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
i=2
(2)
5
X
6
X
n
(4)
n+1
n=1
i=0
i=2
(2)
5
X
2i = 20 + 21 + 22 + 23 + 24 + 25 = 63
(3)
n
X
i=1
C
O
i=0
PY
(1)
ai = a1 + a2 + a3 + + an
6
X
n
1
2
3 2
5
6
= +
+
+ +
+
(4)
n+1
2
3
4
5
6
7
n=1
EP
E
(1) 1 +
(3) a2 + a4 + a6 + a8 + + a20
(4) 1 +
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
+ + +
+
+
+
2 4 8 16 32 64 128
100
X1
1 1 1
1
Solution. (1) 1 + + + + +
=
2 3 4
100 n=1 n
(2) 1 + 2 3 + 4 5 + 25
= (1)1 1 + (1)2 2 + (1)3 3 + (1)4 4
+ (1)5 5 + + (1)25 25
=
25
X
(1)j j
j=1
88
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) a2 + a4 + a6 + a8 + + a20
= a2(1) + a2(2) + a2(3) + a2(4) + + a2(10)
=
10
X
a2i
i=1
X 1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
+
+
+
=
(4) 1 + + + +
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 k=0 2k
PY
The sigma notation of a sum expression is not necessarily unique. For example, the last item in the preceding example can also be expressed in sigma
notation as follows:
8
X 1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
+
+
+
=
.
1+ + + +
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 k=1 2k1
Seatwork/Homework 2.2.1
C
O
However, this last sigma notation is equivalent to the one given in the example.
(a)
5
X
k=1
n
X
EP
E
(b)
xj
Answer: x + x2 + x3 + + xn
j=1
(c)
6
X
j=3
4
X
(j 2 j)
Answer: 68
(1)k+1 k
Answer: 2
(d)
Answer: 28
k=1
(e)
3
X
n=1
(an+1 an )
Answer: a4 a1
(a) x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x
Answer:
5
X
kxk
k=1
(b) 1 2 + 3 4 + 5 6 + 10
Answer:
10
X
(1)k+1 k
k=1
89
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes
Equivalent answer:
1+3+5+ +101 =
51
X
(2k 1)
k=1
(c) 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + + 101
Answer:
50
X
(2k + 1)
k=0
Answer:
4
X
a4k
k=1
(e) 1
1 1 1 1
+ +
3 5 7 9
Answer:
4
X
k=0
(1)k
2k + 1
i=1
in terms of n.
i = 1 + 2 + 3 + + n
C
O
n
X
PY
Teaching Notes
This illustration
can be done with
manipulatives, and
allow the students
to guess.
EP
E
The sum can be evaluated in different ways. One informal but simple approach
is pictorial.
n
X
i=1
i = 1 + 2 + 3 + + n =
n(n + 1)
2
Another way is to use the formula for an arithmetic series with a1 = 1 and
an = n:
n(a1 + an )
n(n + 1)
S=
=
.
2
2
We now derive some useful summation facts. They are based on the axioms
of arithmetic addition and multiplication.
90
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
n
X
cf (i) = c
i=m
n
X
f (i),
i=m
Proof.
i=m
PY
n
X
Teaching Notes
Some proofs can be
skipped. However,
it is helpful if they
are all discussed in
class.
i=m
[f (i) + g(i)] =
i=m
n
X
g(i)
i=m
i=m
f (i) +
i=m
Proof.
n
X
n
X
C
O
n
X
[f (i) + g(i)]
EP
E
i=m
n
X
i=m
c = c(n m + 1)
Proof.
n
X
i=m
c = c| + c + c{z+ + }c
nm+1 terms
= c(n m + 1)
91
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A special case of the above result which you might encounter more often is
the following:
n
X
c = cn.
i=1
Telescoping Sum
i=m
[f (i + 1) f (i)] = f (n + 1) f (m)
PY
n
X
Proof.
n
X
f (i + 1) f (i)
C
O
i=m
= [f (m + 1) f (m)] + [f (m + 2) f (m + 1)]
+ [f (m + 3) f (m + 2)] + + [f (n + 1) f (n)]
Note that the terms, f (m + 1), f (m + 2), . . . , f (n), all cancel out. Hence, we have
[f (i + 1) f (i)] = f (n + 1) f (m).
n
X
30
X
EP
E
i=m
i=1
(4i 5).
Solution.
30
X
i=1
(4i 5) =
30
X
4i
i=1
30
X
=4
i=1
30
X
i=1
30
X
5
5
i=1
(30)(31)
5(30)
2
= 1710
=4
Solution.
1
1
1
1
+
+
+ +
12 23 34
99 100
99
X
1
=
i(i + 1)
i=1
=
99
X
i+1i
i(i + 1)
i=1
99
X
C
O
1
and the telescoping-sum property, we get
i
99
X
1
1
1
99
=
.
=
i(i + 1)
100 1
100
i=1
Using f (i) =
PY
i
i+1
=
i(i + 1) i(i + 1)
i=1
99
X
1
1
=
i
i+1
i=1
99
X
1
1
=
i
+
1
i
i=1
EP
E
n
X
i=1
f (i) = i3 .
n
X
3
i (i 1)3 = n3 03 = n3 .
i=1
On the other hand, using expansion and the other properties of summation,
we have
n
n
X
3
X
i (i 1)3 =
(i3 i3 + 3i2 3i + 1)
i=1
i=1
n
X
=3
i=1
n
n
X
X
i 3
i+
1
2
i=1
i=1
n
X
n(n + 1)
=3
i2 3
+ n.
2
i=1
93
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
n
X
6
i2 3n(n + 1) + 2n = 2n3
i=1
n
X
6
i2 = 2n3 2n + 3n(n + 1)
PY
i=1
C
O
= 2n(n2 1) + 3n(n + 1)
= 2n(n 1)(n + 1) + 3n(n + 1)
= n(n + 1)[2(n 1) + 3]
= n(n + 1)(2n + 1).
Finally, after dividing both sides of the equation by 6, we obtain the desired
formula
n
X
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
i2 =
.
2
6
i=1
Seatwork/Homework 2.2.2
EP
E
50
X
k=1
(b)
n
X
(2 3k)
Answer: 3725
(1 + 2j)
Answer: 2n + n2
j=1
99
X
(c)
j=1
i+1+ i
Solution:
99
X
j=1
Answer: 9
99
X
i+1 i
1
1
=
i+1+ i
i
+
1
+
i
i
+
1
i
j=1
99
X
=
i+1 i
j=1
= 99 + 1 1
=9
94
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. If
n
X
Answer: 4
i=1
Exercises 2.2
1. Expand each sum.
i
x+i
i=5
(b)
6
X
Answer:
2i
1
2
3
4
5
+
+
+
+
x+1 x+2 x+3 x+4 x+5
Answer: 0 +
i=0
3
X
(c)
3i
3
6 + 2 + 3 10 + 3 12
PY
(a)
9
X
2+
4+
C
O
i=2
(a) 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + + 12
12
Answer:
12
X
ii
i=1
(b) (x 5) + (x 3) + (x 1) + (x + 1) + (x + 3) + + (x + 15)
7
X
Answer:
[x + (2i + 1)]
EP
E
i=3
Answer:
9
X
Teaching Notes
Another possible
answer for (b) is
11
X
[x + (2i 7)].
i=1
ai 2
i=1
Answer: 27240
(a)
120
X
i=1
(b)
50
X
i=1
(c)
n
X
i=1
4. If
30
X
i=1
Answer: 230900
(3i 1)2
f (i) = 70 and
Answer:
30
X
i=1
6n3 + 3n2 3n + 2
2
30
X
3g(i) f (i) + 7
i=1
Answer: 145
95
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. If s =
6. If s =
100
X
i=1
n
X
200
X
i, express
i in terms of s.
Answer: 2s + 100000
i=1
i=1
n
X
a2i = s2 ?
i=1
Answer: No. If s =
2
X
ai = a1 + a2 , then
i=1
n
X
i=1
PY
n
X
i=1
Answer:
n2 (n + 1)2
4
C
O
EP
E
96
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
Part 1
Part 2
97
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Let us now take a look at some examples on the use of mathematical induction
in proving summation identities.
EP
E
n(n + 1)
2
Solution. We need to establish the two conditions stated in the Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Part 1. Prove that the identity is true for n = 1.
The left-hand side of the equation consists of one term equal to 1. The righthand side becomes
1(1 + 1)
2
= = 1.
2
2
Hence, the formula is true for n = 1.
Part 2. Assume that the formula is true for n = k 1:
1 + 2 + 3 + + k =
k(k + 1)
.
2
98
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(k + 1)(k + 1 + 1)
.
2
Using the formula for n = k and adding k + 1 to both sides of the equation,
we get
k(k + 1)
+ (k + 1)
2
k(k + 1) + 2(k + 1)
=
2
(k + 1)(k + 2)
=
2
(k + 1) [(k + 1) + 1]
=
2
C
O
PY
1 + 2 + 3 + + k + (k + 1) =
Sn =
r 6= 1.
EP
E
Solution. Let an be the nth term of a geometric series. From Lesson 2.1, we know
that an = a1 rn1 .
Part 1. Prove that the formula is true for n = 1.
a1 (1 r1 )
= a1 = S 1
1r
a1 (1 rk )
. We
1r
Teaching Notes
The fact that
an = a1 rn1 can
also be proven by
mathematical
induction. Here,
however, we simply
recall a formula in
Lesson 2.1 because
our focus in this
example is the
proof of the sum.
a1 (1 rk+1 )
.
1r
We know that
Sk+1 = a1 + a2 + + ak +ak+1
|
{z
}
Sk
= Sk + ak+1
99
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
=
=
=
=
a1 1 r k
+ a1 rk
1r
a1 1 rk + a1 rk (1 r)
1r
k
a1 1 r + rk rk+1
1 r
k+1
a1 1 r
1r
PY
Sn =
for all positive integers n.
C
O
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
6
EP
E
Part 1
Solution. We again establish the two conditions stated in the Principle of Mathematical Induction.
123
1(1 + 1)(2 1 + 1)
=
= 1 = 12
6
6
The formula is true for n = 1.
Part 2
k(k + 1)(2k + 1)
.
6
Prove: 12 + 22 + 32 + + k 2 + (k + 1)2
(k + 1)(k + 2) [2(k + 1) + 1]
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 3)
=
.
6
Assume: 12 + 22 + 32 + + k 2 =
12 + 22 + 32 + + k 2 + (k + 1)2
k(k + 1)(2k + 1)
=
+ (k + 1)2
6
k(k + 1)(2k + 1) + 6(k + 1)2
=
6
100
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
12 + 22 + 32 + + n2 =
1 3 + 2 4 + 3 5 + + n(n + 2) =
Answer:
Part 1
n(n + 1)(2n + 7)
.
6
EP
E
29
1(1 + 1)[2(1) + 7]
=
=3=13
6
6
The formula is true for n = 1.
Part 2
k(k + 1)(2k + 7)
6
To show: 1 3 + 2 4 + + k(k + 2) + (k + 1)(k + 3)
(k + 1)(k + 2) [2(k + 1) + 7]
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 9)
=
6
Assume: 1 3 + 2 4 + 3 5 + + k(k + 2) =
1 3 + 2 4 + + k(k + 2) + (k + 1)(k + 3)
k(k + 1)(2k + 7)
=
+ (k + 1)(k + 3)
6
(k + 1)
=
[k(2k + 7) + 6(k + 3)]
6
(k + 1) 2
=
2k + 13k + 18
6
101
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes
Recall the
definition of
divisibility: an
integer n is
divisible by an
integer k if n = kr
for some integer r.
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 9)
6
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, the formula is true for all positive
integers n.
2.3.2. Proving Divisibility Statements
We now prove some divisibility statements using mathematical induction.
PY
Example 2.3.4. Use mathematical induction to prove that, for every positive
integer n, 7n 1 is divisible by 6.
Part 1
71 1 = 6 = 6 1
71 1 is divisible by 6.
Part 2
C
O
Solution. Similar to what we did in the previous session, we establish the two
conditions stated in the Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Assume: 7k 1 is divisible by 6.
EP
E
7k+1 1 = 7 7k 1 = 6 7k + 7k 1 = 6 7k + (7k 1)
102
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Part 1. Note that claim of the statement is that it is true for every nonnegative
integer n. This means that Part 1 should prove that the statement is true for
n = 0.
03 0 + 3 = 3 = 3(1)
03 0 + 3 is divisible by 3.
Part 2. We assume that k 3 k + 3 is divisible by 3. By definition of divisibility,
we can write k 3 k + 3 = 3a for some integer a.
PY
C
O
(k + 1)3 (k + 1) + 3 = k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k + 3
= (k 3 k + 3) + 3k 2 + 3k
= 3a + 3k 2 + 3k
= 3(a + k 2 + k)
EP
E
Use mathematical induction to prove each divisibility statement for all nonnegative integers n.
(1) 72n 3 5n + 2 is divisible by 12.
Answer:
Part 1
= 72 72k 3 5 5k + 2
103
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
= 49 72k 15 5k + 2
= 72k + 48 72k 3 5k 12 5k + 2
= 72k 3 5k + 2 + 48 72k 12 5k
= 72k 3 5k + 2 + 12 4 72k 5k
By the hypothesis,
72k 3 5k + 2 is divisible by 12. The second term,
12 4 72k 5k , is divisible by 12 because 4 72k 5k is an integer. Hence
their sum, which is equal to 72(k+1) 3 5(k+1) + 2, is divisible by 12.
PY
03 + 3 02 + 2(0) = 0 = 3(0)
C
O
Part 1
Thus, 03 + 3 02 + 2(0) is divisible by 3.
Part 2
Assume: k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k is divisible by 3.
= k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k = 3a, a integer
EP
E
Solution. Just like the previous example, we establish the two conditions in the
Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Part 1
23 = 8 > 6 = 2(3)
This confirms that 23 > 2(3).
Part 2
Assume: 2k > 2k, where k is an integer with k 3
PY
C
O
EP
E
The right-most expression above, 2k + 2k , is equal to 2 2k = 2k+1 .
True
21 = 2 = 2(1)
False
22 = 4 = 2(2)
False
The inequality is not always true for nonnegative integers less than 3. This
illustrates the necessity of Part 1 of the proof to establish the result. However,
the result above can be modified to: 2n 2n for all nonnegative integers n.
Before we discuss the next example, we review the factorial notation. Recall
105
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Given that 3k < (k + 2)!, we multiply both sides of the inequality by 3 and
obtain
3 3k < 3 [(k + 2)!] .
and so
since k > 0,
EP
E
When n = 2: 32 =
Seatwork/Homework 2.3.3
Use mathematical induction to prove that 2n + 3 < 2n for n 4.
106
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
Part 1
2(4) + 3 = 11 < 16 = 24
Thus, 2(4) + 3 <= 24 .
Part 2
Assume: 2k + 3 < 2k , k 4
PY
2(k + 1) + 3 = 2k + 5 = (2k + 3) + 2
Exercises 2.3
C
O
(3)
3n2 + n
2
1
1
1
n
1
+
+
+ +
=
12 23 34
n(n + 1)
n+1
EP
E
(2)
(3i 1) =
(1)
n
X
i=1
2 3i1 = 3n 1
Hint:
k+1
X
i1
23
i=1
n
X
i3 =
i=1
n2 (n + 1)2
4
(4)
k
X
i=1
n [2a1 + (n 1)d]
2
k+1
X
i=1
i i! =
k
X
i=1
(k + 1)!(1 + k + 1) 1 = (k + 2)! 1
(7) 7n 4n is divisible by 3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
108
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) determine any term in (x + y)n , where n is a positive integer, without expanding; and
(4) solve problems using mathematical induction and the Binomial Theorem.
Lesson Outline
(1) Expand (x + y)n for small values of n using Pascals Triangle
(2) Review the definition of and formula for combination
(3) State and prove the Binomial Theorem
(4) Compute all or specified terms of a binomial expansion
PY
C
O
EP
E
Teaching Notes
Calculations with
big numbers are
required in many
of the examples
and exercises in
this section. The
use of scientific
calculators is
desirable.
Teaching Notes
You may ask the
students to expand
these powers using
long multiplication.
(a + b)1 = a + b
(a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
(a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2 b + 3ab2 + b3
(a + b)4 = a4 + 4a3 b + 6a2 b2 + 4ab3 + b4
(a + b)5 = a5 + 5a4 b + 10a3 b2 + 10a2 b3 + 5ab4 + b5
Teaching Notes
The concept of
combination was
introduced in
Grade 10. In
particular, the
concept was
discussed with
competency codes
from M10SP-IIIc-1
to M10SP-IIId-e-1.
n=2:
n=3:
n=4:
n=5: 1
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
3
6
10
1
4
10
1
5
109
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The preceding triangular array of numbers is part of what is called the Pascals Triangle, named after the French mathematician, Blaise Pascal (1623-1662).
Some properties of the Triangle are the following:
(1) Each row begins and ends with 1.
(2) Each row has n + 1 numbers.
(3) The second and second to the last number of each row correspond to the
row number.
PY
C
O
(6) Every middle number after first row is the sum of the two numbers above
it.
It is the last statement which is useful in constructing the succeeding rows of the
triangle.
Example 2.4.1. Use Pascals Triangle to expand the expression (2x 3y)5 .
Solution. We use the coefficients in the fifth row of the Pascals Triangle.
EP
E
Solution. We start with the sixth row (or any row of the Pascals Triangle that
we remember).
n=6:
n=7:
n=8: 1
1
1
6
7
15
21
28
20
35
56
15
35
70
6
21
56
1
7
28
1
8
Therefore, we get
(a + b)8 = a8 + 8a7 b + 28a6 b2 + 56a5 b3
+ 70a4 b4 + 56a3 b5 + 28a2 b6
+ 8ab7 + b8
110
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
These properties can explain some of the observations we made on the numbers in the Pascals Triangle. Also recall the general formula for the number of
combinations of n objects taken k at a time:
n
n!
,
C(n, k) =
=
k!(n k)!
k
EP
E
Solution.
5!
5
5!
=
= 10
=
(5 3)!3!
2!3!
3
8
8!
10!
=
=
= 56
5
(8 5)!5!
3!5!
You may observe that the value of 53 and the fourth coefficient
in the fifth
8
row of Pascals Triangle are the same. In the same manner, 5 is equal to the
sixth coefficient in the expansion of (a + b)8 (see Example 2.4.2). These observed
equalities are not coincidental, and they are, in fact, the essence embodied in the
Binomial Theorem, as you will see in the succeeding sessions.
Seatwork/Homework 2.4.1
1. Use Pascals Triangle to expand each expression.
(a) (x 2y)4
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) (2a b2 )3
(c) (a + b)9
Answer: a9 +9a8 b+36a7 b2 +84a6 b3 +126a5 b4 +126a4 b5 +84a3 b6 +36a2 b7 +
9ab8 + b9
C
O
PY
2. Compute.
5
(a)
Answer: 10
2
9
(b)
Answer: 36
7
12
(c)
Answer: 66
10
20
(d)
Answer: 15504
5
n
n(n 1)
3. Prove:
=
.
2
2
Answer:
n
n!
n(n 1)(n 2)!
n(n 1)
=
=
=
2
(n 2)!2!
(n 2)!2!
2
EP
E
As the power n gets larger, the more laborious it would be to use Pascals Triangle
(and impractical to use long multiplication) to expand (a + b)n . For example,
using Pascals Triangle, we need to compute row by row up to the thirtieth row
to know the coefficients of (a + b)30 . It is, therefore, delightful to know that it is
possible to compute the terms of a binomial expansion of degree n without going
through the expansion of all the powers less than n.
112
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
factors from the n factors, which is exactly C(n, i). Therefore, we have
n
X
n ni i
n
(a + b) =
a b.
i
i=0
To explain the reasoning above, consider the case n = 3.
(a + b)3 = (a + b)(a + b)(a + b)
= aaa + aab + aba + abb + baa + bab + bba + bbb
= a3 + 3a2 b + 3ab2 + b3
PY
That is, each term in the expansion is obtained by choosing either a or b in each
factor. The term a3 is obtained when a is chosen each time, while a2 b is obtained
when a is selected 2 times, or equivalently, b is selected exactly once.
C
O
We will give another proof of this result using mathematical induction. But
first, we need to prove a result about combinations.
Pascals Identity
EP
E
Teaching Notes
The formula can
also be proved
using
the fact that
n
is the number
k
of ways to choose k
from n distinct
objects. Suppose a
is one of the n
objects. Then, in
selecting k objects,
either a is selected
or not. If a is
included in the k
objects, then
there
n
are k1
ways to
complete the
selection of the k
objects; if a is not
included, then
there are n
ways.
k
k
X
k
C
O
(a + b) =
i=0
k+1
aki bi .
k+1
X
k + 1 k+1i i
=
a
b.
i
i=0
(a + b)
PY
Part 1
EP
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
k+1
X
k + 1 k+1i i
=
a
b
i
i=0
The last expression above follows from Pascals Identity.
Therefore, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction,
n
X
n ni i
n
(a + b) =
a b
i
i=1
PY
Solution.
C
O
6
X
6 6k k
(x + y) =
x y
k
k=0
6 5 1
6 4 2
6 6 0
=
xy +
xy +
xy
1
2
0
6 3 3
6 2 4
6 1 5
+
xy +
xy +
xy
3
4
5
6 0 6
+
xy
6
= x6 + 6x5 y + 15x4 y 2 + 20x3 y 3
+ 15x2 y 2 + 6xy 5 + y 6
EP
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes
To find a specific
term in the
expansion of
(a + b)n , it is
important to find
the value of k.
20
y .
x
2
+ 3y
6
C
O
PY
Solution. Since there are seven terms in the expansion, the middle term is the
fourth term (k = 3), which is
3
135x3 y 3
x
6
x 3
3
3
(3y) = 20
.
2
27y =
2
8
2
3
Example 2.4.7. Find the term involving x (with exponent 1) in the expansion
8
2y
2
of x
.
x
Solution. The general term in the expansion is
EP
E
k
8 162k (2)k y k
8
2y
2 8k
=
x
k
x
xk
k
8
=
(2)k x162kk y k
k
8
=
(2)k x163k y k .
k
2a b
2 5
5
5
5
=
(2a) +
(2a)4 b2
0
1
116
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3
5
5
2 2
3
(2a)2 b2
+
(2a) b +
3
2
5
4
5
5
b2
+
(2a) b2 +
5
4
5
4 2
3 4
= 32a 80a b + 80a b 40a2 b6
+ 10ab8 b10
11
2
2. Find the two middle terms in the expansion of x +
.
y
Answer: There are 12 terms in the expansion, so the two middle terms are the
6th (corresponding to k = 5) and the 7th (corresponding to k = 6) terms.
PY
1/3
C
O
5
2
11
32
14784x2
1/3 115
2
x
= 462x
=
5
y
y5
y5
6
29568x5/3
11
64
2
5/3
1/3 116
= 462x
=
x
y
y6
y6
6
3. Find the constant term in the expansion of
x3
3
+ 2
2
x
10
EP
E
3 10k k 303k k
3
10
x
3
10
x
=
2
10k
2
x
k
2
x2k
k
k
10 3
x305k
=
k 210k
117
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution.
8
8
X
8
(1)8k (0.2)k
k
k=0
8
X
8
=
(0.2)k
k
k=0
(0.8) = (1 0.2) =
PY
2
X
8
8
8
8
k
(1)
(0.2) =
+
(0.2) +
(0.2)2
k
0
1
2
k=0
C
O
4
X
8
8
8
8
k
(2)
(0.2) =
+
(0.2) +
(0.2)2
k
0
1
2
k=0
8
8
3
+
(0.2) +
(0.2)4
3
4
= 0.52 0.448 + 0.112 = 0.184
EP
E
Example 2.4.9. Use the Binomial Theorem to prove that, for any positive integer n,
n
X
n
= 2n .
k
k=0
100
100 X
100
1 + (1)
=
(1)100k (1)k .
k
k=0
118
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
100
100
100
100
2
0=
+
(1) +
(1) +
(1)3
0
1
2
3
100
100
99
+ +
(1) +
(1)100
99
100
PY
0
1
2
3
100
100
+
+
99
100
C
O
Therefore, after transposing the negative terms to other side of the equation, we
obtain
100
100
100
100
+
+
+ +
0
2
4
100
100
100
100
100
=
+
+
+ +
2
1
3
5
99
Seatwork/Homework 2.4.4
EP
E
10
(1.9)
10
= (2 0.1)
2
X
10
k=0
10
210k (0.1)k
= 2 10 29 0.1 + 45 28 0.12
= 627.2
Answer: 4 = (1 + 3) =
n
X
n
k=0
nk k
3 =
n
X
n
k=0
3k
119
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Exercises 2.4
1. Use the Binomial Theorem to expand each expression.
(a) (x 2)5
7
1
(b) x +
y
Answer: x7 +
1
3
2
4
PY
(c)
C
O
2. Without expanding completely, compute the indicated term(s) in the expansion of the given expression.
15
1
15x41 105x37
3
+
(a) x +
, first 3 terms
Answer: x45 +
2x
2
4
EP
E
1
(d)
x
, 6th term
y
18
1
1
(e)
, middle term
p+
2
q
11
2 a2
(f)
+
, two middle terms
a
3
9
(g)
y + x , term involving y 3
16
1
2x , constant term
(h)
x3
3247695 4
x
256
Answer:
53130x10
y5
Answer:
12155p9
128q 9
Answer:
9856 4 4928 7
a +
a
81
243
Answer: 84x3 y 3
Answer:
366080
729
21
(j)
, term in which the exponents of x and y are equal
y2
x
43758
Answer: 6 6
xy
PY
50
X
50
(2)k = 1.
k
k=0
EP
E
C
O
121
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Unit 3
EP
E
C
O
PY
Trigonometry
Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park, by Giovanni G. Navata, 12 November 2010,
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File%3AUnderground River.jpg. Public Domain
Named as one of the New Seven Wonders of Nature in 2012 by the New7Wonders
Foundation, the Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park is worldfamous for its limestone karst mountain landscape with an underground river.
The Park was also listed as UNESCO World Heritage Site in 1999. The underground river stretches about 8.2 km long, making it one of the worlds longest
rivers of its kind.
122
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
Angles are being used in several fields like engineering, medical imaging, electronics, astronomy, geography and many more. Added to that, surveyors, pilots,
landscapers, designers, soldiers, and people in many other professions heavily use
angles and trigonometry to accomplish a variety of practical tasks. In this lesson, we will deal with the basics of angle measures together with arc length and
sectors.
3.1.1. Angle Measure
An angle is formed by rotating a ray about its endpoint. In the figure shown
below, the initial side of AOB is OA, while its terminal side is OB. An angle
is said to be positive if the ray rotates in a counterclockwise direction, and the
angle is negative if it rotates in a clockwise direction.
Teaching Notes
Angles in
trigonometry differ
from angles in
Euclidean
geometry in the
sense of motion.
An angle in
geometry is defined
as a union of rays
(that is, static)
and has measure
between 0 and
180 . An angle in
trigonometry is a
rotation of a ray,
and, therefore, has
no limit. It has
positive and
negative directions
and measures.
123
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
EP
E
0
00
10 30 18 = 10 30 +
60
0
= 10 30.3
30.3
= 10 +
60
= 10.505
and
C
O
PY
A central angle of the unit circle that intercepts an arc of the circle
with length 1 unit is said to have a measure of one radian, written 1
rad. See Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1
EP
E
rad, 3
rad,
4
3
2
rad, 2 rad
125
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution.
OE
rad: OB; 3
rad: OD;
4
3
2
Since a unit circle has circumference 2, a central angle that measures 360
has measure equivalent to 2 radians. Thus, we obtain the following conversion
rules.
PY
C
O
.
180
180
.
EP
E
Figure 3.2 shows some special angles in standard position with the indicated
terminal sides. The degree and radian measures are also given.
Figure 3.2
126
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
75
5
=
180
12
4
240
=
180
3
Solution.
11
6
180
rad and
75 =
240 =
11
6
4
rad
3
= 22.5
rad = 22.5
8
= 330
11
rad = 330
6
180
Seatwork/Homework 3.1.1
rad in degrees.
C
O
5
rad
12
PY
Solution.
EP
E
(c) 150
(b) 90
Answer: 2
Answer: 5
6
Answer:
rad
rad
rad
(b)
rad
9
3
rad
4
Answer: 20
Answer: 135
Two angles in standard position that have a common terminal side are called
coterminal angles. Observe that the degree measures of coterminal angles differ
by multiples of 360 .
Two angles are coterminal if and only if their degree measures differ
by 360k, where k Z.
Similarly, two angles are coterminal if and only if their radian measures differ by 2k, where k Z.
127
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
As a quick illustration, to find one coterminal angle with an angle that measures 410 , just subtract 360 , resulting in 50 . See Figure 3.3.
Figure 3.3
Example 3.1.4. Find the angle coterminal with 380 that has measure
EP
E
Solution. A negative angle moves in a clockwise direction, and the angle 380
lies in Quadrant IV.
(1) 380 + 2 360 = 340
Seatwork/Homework 3.1.2
1. Find the angle between 0 and 360 (if in degrees) or between 0 rad and 2 rad
(if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
(a) 736
Answer: 16
13
2
rad
Answer:
? (d) 10 rad
rad
2. Find the angle between 360 and 0 (if in degrees) or between 2 rad and
0 rad (if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
128
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) 142
Answer: 218
Answer: 40 10 2300
Answer: 11
rad
6
rad
? (d) 20 rad
circumference of circle =
(2r) = r.
2
2
Teaching Notes
Review how arcs
were measured in
Grade 10. What
unit of measure
was used? For two
circles with
different radii, do
equal central
angles intercept
arcs of the same
measure?
Conclude that
previous notion of
arc measure is not
the same as length.
Arcs are now
measured in terms
of length and
measure changes
with the radius of
the circle.
EP
E
C
O
s=
PY
In a circle, a central angle whose radian measure is subtends an arc that is the
Figure 3.4
Example 3.1.5. Find the length of an arc of a circle with radius 10 m that
subtends a central angle of 30 .
Solution. Since the given central angle is in degrees, we have to convert it into
radian measure. Then apply the formula for an arc length.
= rad
30
180
6
5
s = 10
=
m
2
6
3
129
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6
3
s
= = rad
r
4
2
EP
E
C
O
PY
of a complete
has measure radians, then the sector makes up the fraction 2
circle. See Figure 3.5. Since the area of a complete circle with radius r is r2 , we
have
1
Area of a sector =
(r2 ) = r2 .
2
2
Figure 3.5
Example 3.1.7. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle 60 if
the radius of the circle is 3 m.
Solution. First, we have to convert 60 into radians. Then apply the formula for
computing the area of a sector.
60
= rad
180
3
1
3 2
A = (32 ) =
m
2
2
3
2
130
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.1.8. A sprinkler on a golf course fairway is set to spray water over
a distance of 70 feet and rotates through an angle of 120 . Find the area of the
fairway watered by the sprinkler.
Solution.
2
=
rad
180
3
1
2
4900
A = (702 )
=
5131 ft2
2
3
3
120
PY
Seatwork/Homework 3.1.3
1. In a circle of radius 7 feet, find the length of the arc that subtends a central
angle of 5 radians.
Answer: 35 ft
C
O
Exercises 3.1
EP
E
131
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: 12
Answer: 7
12
53
Answer: 36
Answer: 2
3
7
Answer: 4
(a) 330
Answer:
(b) 480
(c) 15
(d) 105
(e) 265
(f) 120
PY
(g) 315
rad
rad
rad
rad
rad
rad
rad
(b)
(c)
(d)
5
rad
6
8
rad
3
15
rad
4
6 rad
rad
7
20
(e)
? (f) 20 rad
? (g) 35 rad
EP
E
? (h) 5 rad
(a)
C
O
Answer: 63
4. Find the angle between 0 and 360 (if in degrees) or between 0 rad and 2 rad
(if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
Answer: 325
(b) 451
Answer: 91
(a) 685
(c) 1400
Answer: 40
(f)
(g)
29
rad
6
3
2 rad
5
6
Answer: 2
Answer:
? (h) 16 rad
? (i) 20 rad
rad
rad
5. Find the angle between 360 and 0 (if in degrees) or between 2 rad and
0 rad (if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
132
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) 685
Answer: 35
(b) 451
Answer: 269
(c) 1400
Answer: 320
(g)
29
rad
6
3
2 rad
Answer: 7
rad
6
Answer: 3
rad
2
? (h) 16 rad
? (i) 20 rad
PY
6. Find the length of an arc of a circle with radius 21 m that subtends a central
m
angle of 15 .
Answer: 7
4
C
O
9. If the radius of a circle is doubled, how is the length of the arc intercepted by
a fixed central angle changed?
Answer: The length is doubled.
EP
E
10. Radian measure simplifies many formulas, such as the formula for arc length,
s = r. Give the corresponding formula when is measured in degrees instead
of radians.
Answer: s = r
180
? 11. As shown below, find the radius of the pulley if a rotation of 51.6 raises the
weight by 11.4 cm.
Answer: 12.7 cm
? 12. How many inches will the weight rise if the pulley whose radius is 9.27 inches
is rotated through an angle of 71 500 ?
Answer: 11.6 in
133
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? 13. Continuing with the previous item, through what angle (to the nearest minute)
must the pulley be rotated to raise the weight 6 in?
Answer: 37 50
? 14. Given a circle of radius 3 in, find the measure (in radians) of the central angle
of a sector of area 16 in2 .
EP
E
C
O
PY
17. If the radius of a circle is doubled and the central angle of a sector is unchanged,
how is the area of the sector changed?
Answer: The area is quadrupled.
18. Give the corresponding formula for the area of a sector when the angle is
2
measured in degrees.
Answer: A = r
360
? 19. A frequent problem in surveying city lots and rural lands adjacent to curves
of highways and railways is that of finding the area when one or more of the
boundary lines is the arc of a circle. Approximate the total area of the lot
shown in the figure.
Answer: 1909.0 m2
134
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
20. Two gears of radii 2.5 cm and 4.8 cm are adjusted so that the smaller gear
drives the larger one, as shown. If the smaller gear rotates counterclockwise
through 225 , through how many degrees will the larger gear rotate?
C
O
PY
Answer: 117
EP
E
Teaching Notes
The teacher can
give a review of
trigonometric
ratios as discussed
in Grade 9.
135
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cos = x
sec =
1
, x 6= 0
x
x
cot = , y 6= 0
y
y
, x 6= 0
x
C
O
tan =
PY
sin = y
Example 3.2.1. Find the values of cos 135 , tan 135 , sin(60 ), and sec(60 ).
EP
E
(a)
(b)
Figure 3.6
Teaching Notes
A 45 -45 right
triangle is isosceles.
Moreover, the
opposite side of the
30 -angle in a
30 -60 right
triangle is half the
length of its
hypotenuse.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Therefore, we get
cos 135 =
2
,
2
3
sin(60 ) =
,
2
tan 135 = 1,
and
sec(60 ) = 2.
PY
2
3
rad =
, sin rad =
,
cos
4
2
3
2
and so on.
C
O
From the above definitions, we define the same six functions on real numbers.
These functions are called trigonometric functions.
Let s be any real number. Suppose is the angle in standard position
with measure s rad. Then we define
csc s = csc
cos s = cos
sec s = sec
tan s = tan
cot s = cot
EP
E
sin s = sin
and
4
2
= cos
rad = cos 45 =
4
2
3
sin
= sin rad = sin(60 ) =
.
3
3
2
In the same way, we have
tan 0 = tan(0 rad) = tan 0 = 0.
Example 3.2.3. Suppose s is a real number such that sin s = 43 and cos s > 0.
Find cos s.
Solution. We may consider s as the angle with measure s rad. Let P (s) = (x, y)
be the point on the unit circle and on the terminal side of angle s.
Since P (s) is on the unit circle, we know that x2 + y 2 = 1. Since sin s = y =
we get
3
x =1y =1
4
2
7
=
16
7
.
4
7
x=
.
4
2
EP
E
C
O
2
PY
34 ,
x1
x
=
1
r
and
sin = y1 =
y1
y
= .
1
r
We may then further generalize the definitions of the six circular functions.
138
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
y
r
r
csc = , y 6= 0
y
cos =
x
r
sec =
tan =
r
, x 6= 0
x
x
cot = , y 6= 0
y
y
, x 6= 0
x
Seatwork/Homework 3.2.1
C
O
PY
We then have a second solution for Example 3.2.3 as follows. With sin s = 43
and sin s = yr , we may choose y = 3 and r = 4 (which is always positive). In
this case, we can solve for x, which is positive since cos s = x4 is given to be
positive.
7
4 = x2 + (3)2 = x = 7 = cos s =
4
1. Given , find the exact values of the six circular functions.
(a) = 30
Answer:
sin 30 = 21 , cos 30 =
2 3
, cot 30 = 3
3
(b) = 3
4
tan 30 =
3
,
3
csc 30 = 2, sec 30 =
EP
E
3
,
2
2
2
3
=
,
cos
=
, tan 3
= 1, csc 3
= 2, sec 3
=
Answer: sin 3
4
2
4
2
4
4
4
3
2, cot 4 = 1
(c) = 150
2, sec(150 ) = 2 3 3 , cot(150 ) = 3
(d) = 4
3
3
4
4
1
4
Answer:
sin(
)
=
,
cos(
)
=
,
tan(
)
=
3, csc( 4
)=
3
2
3
2
3
3
2 3
3
4
4
, sec( 3 ) = 2, cot( 3 ) = 3
3
2. Given a value of one circular function and sign of another function (or the
quadrant where the angle lies), find the value of the indicated function.
Answer: 23
Answer: 54
Answer:
Answer:
3 10
20
985
139
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
We observe that if 1 and 2 are coterminal angles, the values of the six circular
or trigonometric functions at 1 agree with the values at 2 . Therefore, in finding
the value of a circular function at a number , we can always
to a number
reduce
14
2
=
sin
4
=
sin
.
Also, observe
between 0 and 2. For example, sin 14
3
3
3
2
Figure 3.7
EP
E
Figure 3.8
140
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
Figure 3.9
PY
EP
E
Using the fact that the unit circle is symmetric with respect to the x-axis, the
y-axis, and the origin, we can identify the coordinates of all the points using the
coordinates of corresponding points in the Quadrant I, as shown in Figure 3.10
for the special angles.
Figure 3.10
141
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.2.4. Use reference angle and appropriate sign to find the exact value
of each expression.
and cos 11
(3) sin 150
(1) sin 11
6
6
(2) cos 7
(4) tan 8
6
3
1
= sin =
6
6
2
3
11
= cos =
cos
6
6
2
PY
sin
cos 3
3
sin
3
2
1
2
= 3
(4) tan
8
3
1
2
C
O
7
3
cos
= cos =
6
6
2
EP
E
Seatwork/Homework 3.2.2
Use reference angle and appropriate sign to find the exact value of each expression.
(1) sin 510
(2) tan(225 )
Answer: 1
(3) sec 13
3
(4) cot 10
3
1
2
Answer:
Answer: 2
Answer:
3
3
Exercises 3.2
1. Find the exact value.
(a) sin 600
Answer:
(b) tan(810 )
3
2
Answer: Undefined
Answer: 2
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
2
Answer: 12
Answer: 12
(d) cos(420 )
Answer:
(e) sin 7
6
(f) cos 5
3
(g) tan 3
4
Answer: 1
(h) sec 2
3
Answer: 2
(i) csc
(j) cot
(k) cos 4
3
(l) tan 17
3
Answer: 2
Answer: 3
Answer: 12
Answer:
PY
11
6
35
6
(m) cos 7
4
Answer:
(o) sin 4
3
(p) sec 23
6
3
3
2
2
Answer: 2
(q) csc 13
3
(r) tan 5
6
3
2
Answer: 2 3 3
Answer: 2 3 3
Answer: 33
Answer:
C
O
(n) sec 19
4
EP
E
Answer: 1
Answer: 3
Answer: 0
Answer: 0
(e) cos2
Answer: 1
(f)
Answer: 0
(g)
2
+ sin2 2
3
3
11
5
sin 6 + cos 3
2 cos 5
sin 5
3
2
2
tan 4 + 2 cos 8
3
(h)
(i)
(j)
tan 2
tan 5
3
6
1+tan 2
tan 5
3
6
Answer: 0
sin 13
6
Answer: 12
Answer:
11
cos 6
6
6 +cos 5
6
sin
sin(
Teaching Notes
(sin x)2 is denoted
by sin2 x.
Similarly, this
notation is used
with the other
trigonometric
functions. In
general, for a
positive integer n,
sinn x = (sin x)n .
3
3
Answer: 1
3. Compute P (), and find the exact values of the six circular functions.
(a) =
19
6
Answer: P () =
csc 19
= 2, sec
6
23 , 21 , sin 19
= 21 ,
6
19
= 2 3 3 , cot 19
= 3
6
6
cos 19
=
6
3
,
2
tan 19
=
6
3
,
3
143
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) =
32
3
=
Answer: P () = 21 , 23 , sin 32
3
=
csc 32
3
2 3
,
3
3
,
2
sec 32
= 2, cot 32
=
3
3
1
32
cos 32
=
,
tan
=
3,
3
2
3
3
3
4. Given the value of a particular circular function and an information about the
angle , find the values of the other circular functions.
1
2
and
3
2
< < 2
8
and 0 < < 2
(b) sin = 17
Answer: csc = 17
, cos =
8
2 13
13
and
Answer: sec =
23
3
,
2
15
,
17
3
< < 2
2
13
, sin =
2
tan =
8
,
15
sec =
17
,
15
cot =
15
8
13
,
3
cot =
C
O
(c) cos =
PY
(a) cos =
EP
E
(1) determine the domain and range of the different circular functions;
(2) graph the six circular functions with its amplitude, period, and phase shift;
and
(3) solve situational problems involving circular functions.
Lesson Outline
(1) Domain and range of circular functions
(2) Graphs of circular functions
(3) Amplitude, period, and phase shift
Introduction
There are many things that occur periodically. Phenomena like rotation of
the planets and comets, high and low tides, and yearly change of the seasons
144
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
follow a periodic pattern. In this lesson, we will graph the six circular functions
and we will see that they are periodic in nature.
3.3.1. Graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x
Recall that, for a real number x, sin x = sin for an angle with measure x
radians, and that sin is the second coordinate of the point P () on the unit
circle. Since each x corresponds to an angle , we can conclude that
PY
(1) sin x is defined for any real number x or the domain of the sine function is
R, and
(2) the range of sine is the set of all real numbers between 1 and 1 (inclusive).
C
O
From the definition, it also follows that sin(x+2) = sin x for any real number
x. This means that the values of the sine function repeat every 2 units. In this
case, we say that the sine function is a periodic function with period 2.
Table 3.11 below shows the values of y = sin x, where x is the equivalent radian
measure of the special angles and their multiples from 0 to 2. As commented
above, these values determine the behavior of the function on R.
2
2
3
2
7
6
12
0.5
2
3
3
2
1
2
EP
E
0.5
5
4
2
2
0.71 0.87
4
3
3
2
0.87 0.71
3
2
0.71 0.87 1
3
4
2
2
5
3
3
2
7
4
2
2
5
6
1
2
0.5
11
6
12
Table 3.11
From the table, we can observe that as x increases from 0 to 2 , sin x also
increases from 0 to 1. Similarly, as x increases from 3
to 2, sin x also increases
2
from 1 to 0. On the other hand, notice that as x increases from 2 to , sin x
decreases from 1 to 0. Similarly, as x increases from to 3
, sin x decreases from
2
0 to 1.
To sketch the graph of y = sin x, we plot the points presented in Table 3.11,
and join them with a smooth curve. See Figure 3.12. Since the graph repeats
every 2 units, Figure 3.13 shows periodic graph over a longer interval.
145
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes
It is a good
exercise to
construct the
graph of the sine
function using the
height of P ().
Put the unit circle
side-by-side with
the coordinate
plane for the
graph, and trace
the height for each
value of x onto the
graph of y = sin x.
C
O
PY
Figure 3.12
Figure 3.13
We can make observations about the cosine function that are similar to the
sine function.
y = cos x has domain R and range [1, 1].
EP
E
Figure 3.14
From the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x in Figures 3.13 and 3.14, respectively, we observe that sin(x) = sin x and cos(x) = cos x for any real
number x. In other words, the graphs of y = cos(x) and y = cos x are the same,
while the graph of y = sin(x) is the same as that of y = sin x.
In general, if a function f satisfies the property that f (x) = f (x) for all x
in its domain, we say that such function is even. On the other hand, we say that
a function f is odd if f (x) = f (x) for all x in its domain. For example, the
functions x2 and cos x are even, while the functions x3 3x and sin x are odd.
146
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
Figure 3.15
PY
Using a table of values from 0 to 2, we can sketch the graph of y = 3 sin x, and
compare it to the graph of y = sin x. See Figure 3.15 wherein the solid curve
belongs to y = 3 sin x, while the dashed curve to y = sin x. For instance, if x = 2 ,
then y = 1 when y = sin x, and y = 3 when y = 3 sin x. The period, x-intercepts,
and domains are the same for both graphs, while they differ in the range. The
range of y = 3 sin x is [3, 3].
In general, the graphs of y = a sin x and y = a cos x with a > 0 have the same
shape as the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x, respectively. If a < 0, there is
a reflection across the x-axis. The range of both y = a sin x and y = a cos x is
[|a|, |a|].
EP
E
Teaching Notes
Review or teach
the reflection
across the x-axis
when the sign of
the function is
changed.
3
2
0.87
x
y
3
2
0.87
0
3
2
0.87
7
6
3
2
5
4
4
3
3
2
0.87
0.87
2
3
5
6
0.87
0.87
5
3
7
4
11
6
23
0.87
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
2
Table 3.16
147
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Figure 3.17
C
O
Figure 3.17 shows the graphs of y = sin 2x (solid curve) and y = sin x (dashed
curve) over the interval [0, 2]. Notice that, for sin 2x to generate periodic values
similar to [0, 2] for y = sin x, we just need values of x from 0 to . We then
expect the values of sin 2x to repeat every units thereafter. The period of
y = sin 2x is .
2
.
|b|
If 0 < |b| < 1, the graphs are stretched horizontally, and if |b| > 1, the
graphs are shrunk horizontally.
EP
E
(2) Divide the interval into four equal parts, and get five division points: x1 = 0,
x2 , x3 , x4 , and x5 = 2
, where x3 is the midpoint between x1 and x5 (that
|b|
1
is, 2 (x1 + x5 ) = x3 ), x2 is the midpoint between x1 and x3 , and x4 is the
midpoint between x3 and x5 .
(3) Evaluate the function at each of the five x-values identified in Step 2. The
points will correspond to the highest point, lowest point, and x-intercepts
of the graph.
(4) Plot the points found in Step 3, and join them with a smooth curve similar
to the graph of the basic sine curve.
(5) Extend the graph to the right and to the left, as needed.
148
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2
4
(2) Dividing the interval [0, 2 ] into 4 equal parts, we get the following xcoordinates: 0, 8 , 4 , 3
, and 2 .
8
(3) When x = 0, 4 , and 2 , we get y = 0. On the other hand, when x = 8 , we
.
have y = 2 (the amplitude), and y = 2 when x = 3
8
C
O
PY
(4) Draw a smooth curve by connecting the points. There is no need to proceed
to Step 5 because the problem only asks for one cycle.
EP
E
2
1
2
= 4.
(2) We divide the interval [0, 4] into four equal parts, and we get the following
x-values: 0, , 2, 3, and 4.
149
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.3.3. Sketch the graph of two cycles of y = 21 sin 2x
.
3
is the same
Solution. Since the sine function is odd, the graph of y = 21 sin 2x
3
as that of y = 12 sin 2x
.
3
(1) The amplitude is 12 , and the period is
2
2
3
= 3.
(2) Dividing the interval [0, 3] into four equal parts, we get the x-coordinates
of the five important points:
3
,
2
3
2
+ 3
9
=
.
2
4
PY
0 + 3
3
2
=
,
2
4
3
0 + 3
=
,
2
2
and 3, y = 21 when
3
,
4
and y =
1
2
when
C
O
EP
E
(5) We extend the pattern in Step 4 by one more period to the right.
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.2
Answer:
(2) Sketch the graph of two cycles of y = 2 cos x2 .
Answer:
150
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Answer:
(4) Sketch the graph of one cycle of y = 3 sin x3 .
C
O
Answer:
EP
E
using a table of
As x runs from 3 to 7
, the value of the expression x 3 runs from 0 to 2. So
3
for one cycle of the graph of y = sin x 3 , we then expect to have the graph of
y = sin x starting from x = 3 . This is confirmed by the values in Table 3.18. We
then apply a similar procedure to complete one cycle of the graph; that is, divide
the interval [ 3 , 7
] into four equal parts, and then determine the key values of
3
x in sketching the graphs as discussed earlier. The one-cycle graph of y = sin x
(dashed curve) and the corresponding one-cycle graph of y = sin x 3 (solid
curve) are shown in Figure 3.19.
x
x
sin x
5
6
4
3
11
6
7
3
3
2
Teaching Notes
Review or teach
the horizontal
translation rule: if
x is replaced by
x h in the
equation, the
graph is translated
|h| units to the
right if h > 0 and
to the left if h < 0.
Table 3.18
151
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 3.19
PY
Observe that the graph of y = sin x 3 shifts 3 units to the right of
y = sin x. Thus, they have the same period, amplitude, domain, and range.
C
O
The graphs of
have the same shape as y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, respectively, but
shifted c units to the right when c > 0 and shifted |c| units to the left
if c < 0. The number c is called the phase shift of the sine or cosine
graph.
EP
E
7
4
3
,
4
4 +
2
x
y = 3 sin x +
3
4
,
4
3
4
+
2
7
4
7
.
4
We now compute
5
4
3
4
5
4
7
4
152
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Teaching Notes
Review or teach
the vertical
translation rule: if
the equation
y = f (x) is
changed to
y = f (x) + k, the
graph is translated
|k| units upward if
k > 0 and
downward if k < 0.
EP
E
y = 2 cos 2 x
3.
6
.
6
+ 7
2
6
=
,
2
3
+ =
7
6
+ 2
5
3
=
,
2
12
x
y = 2 cos 2 x 6
y = 2 cos 2 x 6 3
2
3
+
2
7
6
11
12
5
12
2
3
11
12
7
6
153
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Before we end this sub-lesson, we make the following observation, which will
be used in the discussion on simple harmonic motion (Sub-Lesson 3.3.6).
Different Equations, The Same Graph
1. The graphs of y = sin x and y = sin(x + 2k), k any integer, are
the same.
EP
E
y = a sin b(x c) + d,
y = a sin[b(x c) + + 2k] + d,
y = a cos[b(x c)
+ 2k] + d,
and
y = a cos[b(x c) +
+ 2k] + d,
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.3
(1) In the same Cartesian
plane, sketch one cycle of the graphs of y = 3 cos x
and y = 3 cos x + 3 1.
154
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Answer:
C
O
1
(2) In the same Cartesian plane,
sketch one cycle of the graphs of y = 4 sin 2x
1
and y = 2 4 sin 2 x 4 .
EP
E
Answer:
x 2.
155
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
sin x
5
6
y = sin x
1
2
1
2
y = csc x
und
7
6
3
2
11
6
12 1 12
2
0
C
O
PY
Table 3.20 shows the key numbers (that is, numbers where y = sin x crosses the
x-axis, attain its maximum and minimum values) and some neighboring points,
where und stands for undefined, while Figure 3.21 shows one cycle of the
graphs of y = sin x (dashed curve) and y = csc x (solid curve). Notice the
asymptotes of the graph y = csc x.
und 2 1 2 und
EP
E
Table 3.20
Figure 3.21
We could also sketch the graph of csc x directly from the graph of y = sin x
by observing the following facts:
(1) If sin x = 1 (or 1), then csc x = 1 (or 1).
(2) At each x-intercept of y = sin x, y = csc x is undefined; but a vertical
asymptote is formed because, when sin x is close to 0, the value of csc x will
have a big magnitude with the same sign as sin x.
156
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
Figure 3.22
PY
Refer to Figure 3.22 for the graphs of y = sin x (dashed curve) and y = csc x
(solid curve) over a larger interval.
Like the sine and cosecant functions, the cosine and secant functions are also
reciprocals of each other. Therefore, y = sec x has domain
{x R : cos x 6= 0} = {x R : x 6=
k
, k odd integer}.
2
EP
E
Similarly, the graph of y = sec x can be obtained from the graph of y = cos x.
These graphs are shown in Figure 3.23.
Figure 3.23
C
O
PY
EP
E
Solution. Sketch the graph of y = cos 2x (note that it has period ), then sketch
the graph of y = sec 2x (as illustrated above), and then move the resulting
graph 2 units upward to obtain the graph of y = 2 sec 2x.
158
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.4
EP
E
Answer:
C
O
(2) Sketch the graph of y = 2 csc 4x 1 on the interval 2 , 2 .
Answer:
159
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
{x R : cos x 6= 0} = {x R : x 6=
k
, k odd integer}.
2
C
O
und
3
3
y = tan x
3
3
und
Table 3.24
EP
E
Teaching Notes
There is also a way
of sketching the
graph of y = tan x
based on the
tangent segment to
the unit circle,
similar to the
construction
described in
sketching the
graph of y = sin x.
But we do not go
anymore into the
details of this
approach.
PY
We note that tan x = 0 when sin x = 0 (that is, when x = k, k any integer), and
that the graph of y = tan x has asymptotes x = k
, k odd integer. Furthermore,
2
by recalling the signs of tangent from Quadrant I to Quadrant IV and its values,
we observe that the tangent function is periodic with period .
Figure 3.25
cos x
sin x
is
{x R : sin x 6= 0} = {x R : x 6= k, k Z},
and its period is also . The graph of y = cot x is shown in Figure 3.26.
160
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Figure 3.26
C
O
(2) Determine the two adjacent vertical asymptotes. For y = a tan bx, these
EP
E
(3) Divide the interval formed by the vertical asymptotes in Step 2 into four
equal parts, and get three division points exclusively between the asymptotes.
(4) Evaluate the function at each of these x-values identified in Step 3. The
points will correspond to the signs and x-intercept of the graph.
(5) Plot the points found in Step 3, and join them with a smooth curve approaching to the vertical asymptotes. Extend the graph to the right and to
the left, as needed.
Solution. The period of the function is 2 , and the adjacent asymptotes are x =
4 , 3
, . . .. Dividing the interval 4 , 4 into four equal parts, the key x-values
4
are 8 , 0, and 8 .
x
y = 21 tan 2x
8
21
1
2
161
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Example 3.3.9. Sketch the graph of y = 2 cot x3 on the interval (0, 3).
Solution. The period of the function is 3, and the adjacent asymptotes are x = 0
and x = 3. We now divide the interval (0, 3) into four equal parts, and the
, 3
, and 9
.
key x-values are 3
4
2
4
x
3
4
9
4
EP
E
y = 2 cot x3
3
2
162
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.5
(1) Sketch the graph of y = cot(x) on the interval [, ].
C
O
PY
Answer:
EP
E
Answer:
163
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
t = 0 sec
t = 2.8 sec
164
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
t = 9 sec
PY
t = 6.1 sec
C
O
Periodic motions are usually modeled by either sine or cosine function, and are
called simple harmonic motions. Unimpeded movements of objects like oscillation, vibration, rotation, and motion due to water waves are real-life occurrences
that behave in simple harmonic motion.
Equations of Simple Harmonic Motion
EP
E
y = a sin b(t c) + d
or
y = a cos b(t c) + d.
period = 2
- the time required to complete one cycle (from one
|b|
highest or lowest point to the next);
frequency =
|b|
2
highest location for the first time. Find the equation of the motion.
Solution. We are given that the weight is located at its lowest position at t = 0;
that is, y = 5 when t = 0. Therefore, the equation is y = 5 cos bt.
Because it took the weight 8 seconds from the lowest point to its immediate
highest point, half the period is 8 seconds.
PY
1 2
= 8 = b =
= y = 5 cos
2
2 b
8
8
? Example 3.3.11. Suppose you ride a Ferris wheel. The lowest point of the
wheel is 3 meters off the ground, and its diameter is 20 m. After it started, the
Ferris wheel revolves at a constant speed, and it takes 32 seconds to bring you
back again to the riding point. After riding for 150 seconds, find your approximate
height above the ground.
C
O
Solution. We ignore first the fixed value of 3 m off the ground, and assume that
the central position passes through the center of the wheel and is parallel to the
ground.
Let t be the time (in seconds) elapsed that you have been riding the Ferris
wheel, and y is he directed distance of your location with respect to the assumed
central position at time t. Because y = 10 when t = 0, the appropriate model
is y = 10 cos bt for t 0.
EP
E
Given that the Ferris wheel takes 32 seconds to move from the lowest point
to the next, the period is 32.
2
= 32 = b =
=
b
16
When t = 150, we get y = 10 cos 150
3.83.
16
y = 10 cos
t
16
Bringing back the original condition given in the problem that the riding point
is 3 m off the ground, after riding for 150 seconds, you are approximately located
3.83 + 13 = 16.83 m off the ground.
2
In the last example, the central position or equilibrium may be vertically
shifted from the ground or sea level (the role of the constant d). In the same way,
the starting point may also be horizontally shifted (the role of the constant c).
Moreover, as observed in Sub-Lesson 3.3.3 (see page 154), to find the function
that describes a particular simple harmonic motion, we can either choose
y = a sin b(t c) + d
or
y = a cos b(t c) + d,
Example 3.3.12. A signal buoy in Laguna Bay bobs up and down with the
height h of its transmitter (in feet) above sea level modeled by h(t) = a sin bt + d
at time t (in seconds). During a small squall, its height varies from 1 ft to 9 ft
above sea level, and it takes 3.5 seconds from one 9-ft height to the next. Find
the values of the constants a, b, and d.
Solution. We solve the constants step by step.
The minimum and maximum values of h(t) are 1 ft and 9 ft, respectively.
Thus, the amplitude is a = 12 (M m) = 12 (9 1) = 4.
PY
Because it takes 3.5 seconds from one 9-ft height to the next, the period is
3.5. Thus, we have 2
= 3.5, which gives b = 4
.
b
7
C
O
Because the lowest point is 1 ft above the sea level and the amplitude is 4,
it follows that d = 5.
2
EP
E
Solution.
Example 3.3.13. A variable star is a star whose brightness fluctuates as observed from Earth. The magnitude of visual brightness of one variable star ranges
from 2.0 to 10.1, and it takes 332 days to observe one maximum brightness to
the next. Assuming that the visual brightness of the star can be modeled by the
equation y = a sin b(t c) + d, t in days, and putting t = 0 at a time when the
star is at its maximum brightness, find the constants a, b, c, and d, where a, b > 0
and c the least nonnegative number possible.
10.1 2.0
M m
=
= 4.05
2
2
2
= 332 = b =
b
166
d = a + m = 4.05 + 2.0 = 6.05
a=
For the (ordinary) sine function to start at the highest point at t = 0, the least
possible horizontal movement to the right (positive value) is 3
units.
2
bc =
3
2
c=
3
3
=
= 249
2b
2 166
? Example 3.3.14. The path of a fast-moving particle traces a circle with equation
(x + 7)2 + (y 5)2 = 36.
It starts at point (1, 5), moves clockwise, and passes the point (7, 11) for the
first time after traveling 6 microseconds. Where is the particle after traveling 15
microseconds?
167
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
The given circle has radius 6 and center (7, 5). Defining the central position
of the values of x as the line x = 7 and that of the values of y as the line y = 5,
we get a = e = 6, d = 7, and h = 5.
From the point (1, 5) to the point (7, 11) (moving clockwise), the particle
has traveled three-fourths of the complete cycle; that is, three-fourths of the
period must be 2.
b=f =
As the particle starts at (1, 5) and moves clockwise, the values of x start
at its highest value (x = 1) and move downward toward its central position
(x = 7) and continue to its lowest value (x = 13). Therefore, the graph of
a sin bt + d has to move 3
= 6 units to the right, and so we get c = 6.
2b
As to the value of g, we observe the values of y start at its central position
(y = 5) and go downward to its lowest value (y = 1). Similar to the argument
used in determining c, the graph of y = e sin f t + h has to move b = 4 units to
the right, implying that g = 4.
EP
E
Teaching Notes
Here, we need an
equation with the
same graph as
y = a sin(bt+ 2 )+d
that will fit in the
equation
y = a sin b(tc)+d,
where c is the least
nonnegative
possible number.
Recall the
observation made
on page 154.
C
O
3 2
3 2
=
=6
4 b
4 f
and
That is, after traveling for 15 microseconds, the particle is located near the point
(2.76, 9.24).
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.6
? 1. A weight is suspended from a spring and is moving up and down in a simple
harmonic motion. At start, the weight is pushed up 6 cm above the resting
168
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
position, and then released. After 14 seconds, the weight reaches again to its
highest position. Find the equation of the motion, and locate the weight with
respect to the resting position after 20 seconds since it was released.
Answer: y = 6 cos 7 t or y = 6 sin pi7 (t + 72 ), location of the weight after 20
seconds: about 5.4 cm below the resting position
PY
2. Suppose the lowest point of a Ferris wheel is 1.5 meters off the ground, and its
radius is 15 m. It makes one complete revolution every 30 seconds. Starting at
the lowest point, find a cosine function that gives the height above the ground
of a riding child in terms of the time t in seconds.
Answer: y = 15 cos 15
t 15
+ 16.5
2
Exercises 3.3
C
O
1. Sketch two cycles of the graph (starting from x = 0) of the given function.
Indicate the amplitude, period, phase shift, domain, and range for each function.
(a) y = 4 sin x
Answer: amplitude = 4, period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [4, 4]
EP
E
(b) y = 3 cos x
Answer: amplitude = 3, period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [3, 3]
(c) y = cos x4
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = 8, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [1, 1]
(d) y = sin 2x
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = , phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [1, 1]
169
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
,
2
C
O
PY
(e) y = 2 + sin 4x
Answer: amplitude = 1, period =
range = [1, 3]
(f) y = 1 + cos x
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [2, 0]
1
,
2
period =
(g) y = 21 sin 3x
Answer: amplitude =
range = [ 12 , 12 ]
2
,
3
EP
E
(h) y = 3 sin(x)
Answer: amplitude = 3, period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [3, 3]
(i) y = 3 2 cos x2
Answer: amplitude = 2, period = 4, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [1, 5]
(j) y = sin x 4
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = 2, phase shift =
range = [1, 1]
,
4
domain = R,
170
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(k) y = 2 cos x + 3
Answer: amplitude = 2, period = 2, phase shift = 3 , domain = R,
range = [2, 2]
C
O
2
,
3
,
2
domain = R,
,
3
domain = R,
EP
E
(m) y = 2 32 cos x 2
Answer: amplitude =
range = [ 34 , 83 ]
PY
(l) y = 3 sin(x 4)
Answer: amplitude = 3, period = 2, phase shift = 4, domain = R,
range = [3, 3]
(n) y = 4 cos x 3 + 2
Answer: amplitude = 4, period = 2, phase shift =
range = [2, 6]
171
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
C
O
PY
(b) y = |4 cos x| + 2
Answer:
3. Sketch the graph of each function over two periods, starting from x = 0.
Indicate the period, phase shift, domain, and range of each function.
(a) y = csc(x)
Answer: period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= k, k Z},
range = (, 1] [1, )
(b) y = cot(x)
Answer: period = , phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= k, k Z},
range = R
(c) y = tan x
Answer: period = , phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 2 , k
Z}, range = R
172
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
EP
E
C
O
(d) y = sec x
Answer: period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 2 , k
Z}, range = (, 1] [1, )
(e) y = sec 3x
Answer: period = 2
, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 6 , k
3
Z}, range = (, 1] [1, )
(f) y = 3 csc x
Answer: period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= k, k Z},
range = (, 3] [3, )
(g) y = 4 sec 2x
3
Answer: period = 3, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 3
, k
4
Z}, range = (, 4] [4, )
(h) y = tan(x + )
173
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
EP
E
(j) y = cot x + 4
Answer: period = , phase shift = 4 , domain = {x|x 6= (2k1) 4 , k even integer},
range = R
(k) y = 2 3 csc x
Answer: period = 2, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= k, k Z},
range = (, 1] [5, )
(l) y = 4 + sec 3x
, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 6 , k
Answer: period = 2
3
Z}, range = (, 3] [6, )
(m) y = 2 sec x 3
Answer: period = 2, phase shift = 3 , domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 3
, k
4
Z}, range = (, 2] [2, )
(n) y = 2 3 sec 2x
3
Answer: period = 3, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 3
, k
4
Z}, range = (, 2] [5, )
174
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
3
,
2
EP
E
C
O
(o) y = 3 csc x 3
2
Answer: period = 2, phase shift =
Z}, range = (, 3] [3, )
4. Assuming that there is no vertical shift, find a function that describes a simple
harmonic motion with the following properties.
(a) sine function; displacement zero at time t = 0; moving up initially;
amplitude = 6 cm; period = 4 sec
Answer: y = 6 sin 2 t
(b) cosine function; highest point 4 cm above the equilibrium at time t = 0;
period = 10 sec
Answer: y = 5 cos 5 t
175
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
It starts at point (3, 1), moves counterclockwise, and passes the point (8, 4)
for the first time after traveling 7 microseconds. Where is the particle after
traveling for 20 microseconds?
Answer: about the point (1.87, 5.11)
C
O
Hint. The coordinates (x, y) of the location of the particle at time t (in mi
(t 7) + 3 and y = 5 sin 14
(t 7) + 4.
croseconds) are given by x = 5 cos 14
EP
E
Hint. The height h(t) (in cm) of the ball at time t (in seconds) is given by
h(t) = |30 sin 3 (t 23 )| + 12.
8. For what values of k do y = cot x and y = cot(x k) have the same graph?
9. For what values of k do y = sec x and y = sec(x k) have the same graph?
176
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
10. Find the least positive value of c such that the graph of y = 2 sin 2(x + c)
coincide with that of y = 2 cos 2x.
Answer: 4
11. Find the largest positive value of c such that the graph of y = 2 cos 3(x c)
coincide with that of y = 2 cos 3(x 2).
Answer: 2 + 3
12. For what values of a do the graphs of y = a cos b(xc) and y = 2 sec 6 (x6)
never intersect for any values of b and c?
Answer: 2 < a < 2
PY
C
O
EP
E
x2 1,
2x + 1,
x2
x
,
3x 4
x
.
x1
177
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
What are the real values of the variable x that make the expressions defined in
the set of real numbers?
In the first expression, every real value of x when substituted to the expression
makes it defined in the set of real numbers; that is, the value of the expression is
real when x is real.
PY
x2 1 R x2 1 0 x 1 or x 1
x = 4 or x = 1
C
O
x2 3x 4 = (x 4)(x + 1) = 0
x
is real when x 6= 4 and x 6= 1.
3x 4
EP
E
In the expressions above, the allowed values of the variable x constitute the
domain of the expression.
The domain of an expression (or equation) is the set of all real values of
the variable for which every term (or part) of the expression (equation)
is defined in R.
In the expressions above, the domains of the first, second, third, and fourth
expressions are R, (, 1] [1, ), R \ {1, 4}, and (1, ), respectively.
Example 3.4.1. Determine the domain of the expression/equation.
x+1
x2 1
(a) 3
2
x + 2x 8x
1x
1 + x2 =
3
2
x2 1
cos2 z
= 4 sin z 1
1 + sin z
178
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x + 1 R x + 1 0 x 1
1x=0
x = 0, x =
x=1
Domain = R \
|
{ k
2
k odd integer}
PY
cos = 0
sin
sin cos 2
cos
k
, k odd integer
2
Domain = R \ {1, 1}
(d) 1 + sin z = 0
z=
C
O
3
the other hand, the expression x2 1 is also defined in R, but it cannot
be zero because it is in the denominator. Therefore, x should not be 1
and 1.
3
2
+ 2k, k Z
Domain = R \ { 3
+ 2k|k Z}
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.1
EP
E
Z
2
1
tan x = sin x
Answer: R \ {1, 1} (2k + 1) 2 |k Z
(4)
1 x2
(1)
Group B
(A1) x2 1 = 0
(B1) x2 1 = (x 1)(x + 1)
(A2) (x + 7)2 = x2 + 49
x2 4
= 2x 1
(A3)
x2
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In each equation in Group A, some values of the variable that are in the
domain of the equation do not satisfy the equation (that is, do not make the
equation true). On the other hand, in each equation in Group B, every element
in the domain of the equation satisfies the given equation. The equations in
Group A are called conditional equations, while those in Group B are called
identities.
PY
(1) x3 2 = x
C
O
Example 3.4.2. Identify whether the given equation is an identity or a conditional equation. For each conditional equation, provide a value of the variable in
the domain that does not satisfy the equation.
3
2 x2 + 3 2x + 3 4
EP
E
1 x
12 x+x
=
(4)
1x
1+ x
(3) This is also a conditional equation. If = 0, then both sides of the equation
are equal to 0. But if = , then the left-hand side of the equation is 0,
while the right-hand side is 2.
(4) This is an identity because the right-hand side of the equation is obtained by
rationalizing the denominator of the left-hand side.
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.2
Identify whether the given equation is an identity or a conditional equation. For
each conditional equation, provide a value of the variable in the domain that does
not satisfy the equation.
(1) 1 + x +
x2
1
=
1x
1x
Answer: identity
180
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cos2 sin2
= cos sin
cos + sin
(3) tan = cot
Answer: identity
(2)
PY
Recall that if P (x, y) is the terminal point on the unit circle corresponding to ,
then we have
y
1
tan =
sin = y csc =
y
x
1
x
cos = x sec =
cot = .
x
y
C
O
From the definitions, the following reciprocal and quotient identities immediately follow. Note that these identities hold if is taken either as a real number
or as an angle.
Reciprocal Identities
1
sin
sec =
1
cos
cot =
1
tan
csc =
EP
E
Quotient Identities
tan =
sin
cos
cot =
cos
sin
(1)
tan cos
=
sin
(2)
cos
cot
sin
cos
cos
=1
sin
cos
cos
= cos = sin
cot
sin
Teaching Notes
The assumption in
the division is that
the divisor is
nonzero.
By dividing both sides of this identity by cos2 and sin2 , respectively, we obtain
tan2 + 1 = sec2
Pythagorean Identities
sin2 + cos2 = 1
tan2 + 1 = sec2
1 + cot2 = csc2
(2)
1 + tan2
1 + cot2
1 + tan2
sec2
=
=
1 + cot2
csc2
1
cos2
1
sin2
sin2
= tan2
2
cos
C
O
Solution.
(2)
PY
In addition to the eight identities presented above, we also have the following
identities.
Even-Odd Identities
cos() = cos
EP
E
sin() = sin
tan() = tan
Teaching Notes
The corresponding
reciprocal
functions follow
the same
Even-Odd
Identities:
csc() = csc
sec() = sec
cot() = cot .
The first two of the negative identities can be obtained from the graphs of
the sine and cosine functions, respectively. (Please review the discussion on page
146.) The third identity can be derived as follows:
tan() =
sin()
sin
=
= tan .
cos()
cos
182
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.4.6. If sec = 25 and tan < 0, use the identities to find the values
of the remaining trigonometric functions of .
Solution. Note that lies in QIV.
1
2
=
sec
5
sin = 1 cos2 =
1
5 21
csc =
=
sin
21
2
2
21
1
=
5
5
PY
cos =
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.3
C
O
521
sin
21
tan =
= 2 =
cos
2
5
2 21
1
=
cot =
tan
21
EP
E
1 + tan x
1 + cot x
1. Use the identities presented in this lesson to simplify each trigonometric expression.
(a)
Solution.
Answer: tan x
1 + tan x
1 + tan x
=
= tan x
1 + cot x
1 + tan1 x
sin
1 + cos
+
Answer: 2 csc
1 + cos
sin
sin
1 + cos
sin2
(1 + cos )(1 + cos )
Solution.
+
=
+
1 + cos
sin
sin (1 + cos )
sin (1 + cos )
2
sin + (1 + 2 cos + cos2 )
=
sin (1 + cos )
2 + 2 cos
2
=
=
= 2 csc
sin (1 + cos )
sin
tan y + cot y
(c)
Answer: 1
sec y csc y
sin y
y
sin2 y+cos2 y
+ cos
tan y + cot y
cos y
sin y
cos y sin y
Solution.
= 1
=
= sin2 y + cos2 y = 1
1
1
sec y csc y
cos y sin y
cos y sin y
(b)
183
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d) 1
cos2
1 + sin
Solution. 1
Answer: sin
1 + sin cos2
cos2
=
1 + sin
1 + sin
2
sin + sin
sin (1 + sin )
=
=
= sin
1 + sin
1 + sin
2. Given some initial values, use the identities to find the values of the remaining
trigonometric functions of .
2
5
1 sin2 =
21
,
5
sec =
PY
(a) sin =
5 21
,
21
C
O
3
2 = 7 , csc =
Answer:
in
QIII;
cos
=
,
sin
cos
4
2 7
3 7
4 7
,
tan
=
,
cot
=
7
3
14
(d) csc =
3
2
EP
E
Answer:
in QII; sin = 23 , cos =
tan = 2 5 5 , cot = 25
1 sin2 = 35 , sec = 3 5 5 ,
sin
.
1 + cos
To verify that it is an identity, recall that we need to establish the truth of the
equation for all values of the variable in the domain of the equation. It is not
enough to verify its truth for some selected values of the variable. To prove it, we
use the fundamental trigonometric identities and valid algebraic manipulations
like performing the fundamental operations, factoring, canceling, and multiplying
the numerator and denominator by the same quantity.
Start on the expression on one side of the proposed identity (preferably the
complicated side), use and apply some of the fundamental trigonometric identities
and algebraic manipulations, and arrive at the expression on the other side of the
proposed identity.
184
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Expression
Explanation
csc cot
cos
1
=
sin
sin
1 cos
sin
1 cos 1 + cos
=
sin
1 + cos
=
PY
1 cos2
(sin )(1 + cos )
sin2
=
(sin )(1 + cos )
Multiply.
sin
1 + cos
C
O
Apply a Pythagorean
identity.
Upon arriving at the expression of the other side, the identity has been established. There is no unique technique to prove all identities, but familiarity with
the different techniques may help.
EP
E
Solution.
1
cos x
cos x
1 cos2 x
=
cos x
sin x
sin2 x
=
= sin x
= sin x tan x
cos x
cos x
sec x cos x =
1 + sin 1 sin
= 4 sin sec2
1 sin 1 + sin
Solution.
1 + sin 1 sin
(1 + sin )2 (1 sin )2
=
1 sin 1 + sin
(1 sin )(1 + sin )
1 + 2 sin + sin2 1 + 2 sin sin2
=
1 sin2
4 sin
=
= 4 sin sec2
cos2
185
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.4
Prove each identity.
1. tan x + cot x = csc x sec x
sin x cos x
+
cos x sin x
sin2 x + cos2 x
1
1
1
=
=
=
= csc x sec x
sin x cos x
sin x cos x
cos x sin x
1
sec tan
1
1
= 1
Answer:
sin
sec tan
cos
cos
cos
=
1 sin
cos
1 + sin
=
1 sin 1 + sin
(cos )(1 + sin )
=
1 sin2
(cos )(1 + sin )
=
cos2
1 + sin
1
sin
=
=
+
= sec + tan
cos
cos cos
sec y + tan y
= tan y
3.
csc y + 1
EP
E
C
O
PY
2. sec + tan =
sec y + tan y
Answer:
=
csc y + 1
sin y
1
+ cos
cos y
y
1
+
1
sin y
1+sin y
cos y
1+sin y
sin y
sin y
= tan y
cos y
1
1
+
1 cos 1 + cos
1
1
1 + cos + 1 cos
2
Answer:
+
=
=
= 2 csc2
2
1 cos 1 + cos
1 cos
sin2
4. 2 csc2 =
Exercises 3.4
1. Find the domain of the equation.
(a) 3 x + 2 x = 2x
Answer: {x|x 0}
Answer: R
k
Answer: R \ 2 |k Z
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
sin2
sec2 1
Answer: cos2
sin2
sin2
sin2
= cos2
=
=
sec2 1
tan2
sin2
cos2
1
1
(b)
+
2
1 + tan x 1 + cot2 x
1
1
1
1
Solution.
+
=
+
2
2
2
1 + tan x 1 + cot x
sec x csc2 x
= cos2 x + sin2 x = 1
Solution.
PY
cos2 x
(c) 1
1 + sin x
sin
cos tan
Solution.
cos2 x
1 sin2 x
=1
1 + sin x
1 + sin x
(1 sin x)(1 + sin x)
=1
1 + sin x
= 1 1 sin x = sin x
Answer: 1
sin
1
= tan
=1
cos tan
tan
(d)
Answer: sin x
C
O
Solution. 1
Answer: 1
EP
E
3. Given some initial information, use the identities to find the values of the
trigonometric functions of .
(a) csc =
5
3
(b) tan = 12
and cos < 0
5
5
5
Answer: in QII; cot = 12
, sec = tan2 + 1 = 13
, cos = 13
,
5
12
13
2
sin = 1 cos = 13 , csc = 12
3
2
2
5
2
Answer:
in
QIII;
sin
,
cos
sin
, sec =
3
3
3 5
2 5
5
5 , tan = 5 , cot = 2
3
2
< < 2
5
,
sec
=
Answer: in QIV; tan =
tan2 + 1 =
7
74
,
7
cos =
7 74
,
74
187
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(e) sin = 1
Answer: coterminal with
tan undefined, cot = 0
3
;
2
(f) cot = 1
Answer: either in QII or QIV
PY
C
O
Answer: identity
EP
E
188
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d)
1 + sin u + cos u
1 + cos u
=
1 + sin u cos u
sin u
Solution
1 + sin u + cos u
1 + sin u + cos u 1 + cos u
=
1 + sin u cos u
sin u + 1 cos u 1 + cos u
(1 + sin u + cos u)(1 + cos u)
=
sin u + sin u cos u + 1 cos2 u
(1 + sin u + cos u)(1 + cos u)
=
sin u + sin u cos u + sin2 u
(1 + sin u + cos u)(1 + cos u)
=
(sin u)(1 + cos u + sin u)
1 + cos u
=
sin u
PY
Teaching Notes
Since you need
1 + cos u to retain
in the numerator
at the end, do not
expand the
numerator.
1 sec2 x
in terms of sin x.
sec2 x
1 sec2 x
1
Solution.
=
1 = cos2 x 1 = sin2 x
2
sec x
sec2 x
C
O
6. Express
1
cos x
sin x
cos2 x
1 cos2 x
Answer:
cos2 x
1 cos2 x
=
cos2 x
EP
E
Answer: sin2 x
tan2 x + 1
tan2 x + 1; csc x =
tan x
Answer:
1
3
1
3
189
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(3) prove other trigonometric identities using fundamental trigonometric identities and sum and difference identities; and
(4) solve situational problems involving trigonometric identities.
C
O
Lesson Outline
(1) The sum and difference identities for cosine, sine, and tangent functions
(2) Cofunction identities
EP
E
In previous lesson, we introduced the concept of trigonometric identity, presented the fundamental identities, and proved some identities. In this lesson, we
derive the sum and difference identities for cosine, sine, and tangent functions,
establish the cofunction identities, and prove more trigonometric identities.
3.5.1. The Cosine Difference and Sum Identities
Let u and v be any real numbers with 0 < v u < 2. Consider the unit circle
with points A = (1, 0), P1 , P2 , P3 , and u and v with corresponding angles shown
in Figure 3.27. Then P1 P2 = AP3 .
Recall that P1 = P (u) = (cos u, sin u), P2 = P (v) = (cos v, sin v), and P3 =
P (u v) = (cos(u v), sin(u v)), so that
p
P1 P2 = (cos u cos v)2 + (sin u sin v)2 ,
while
AP3 =
p
[cos(u v) 1]2 + [sin(u v) 0]2 .
PY
C
O
Figure 3.27
EP
E
Applying the Pythagorean identity cos2 +sin2 = 1 and simplifying the resulting
equations, we obtain
(cos2 u + sin2 u) + (cos2 v + sin2 v) 2 cos u cos v 2 sin u sin v
= [cos2 (u v) + sin2 (u v)] 2 cos(u v) + 1
1 + 1 2 cos u cos v 2 sin u sin v = 1 2 cos(u v) + 1
cos(u v) = cos u cos v + sin u sin v.
Example 3.5.1. Find the exact values of cos 105 and cos 12
.
Solution.
= cos
12
4
6
2
2 2
2
6+ 2
=
4
EP
E
cos
C
O
PY
1
2
3
2
=
2 2 2
2
2 6
=
4
3
5
and sin =
12
,
13
3
4
2
=
sin = 1 cos = 1
5
5
cos =
1 sin =
12
13
2
5
13
192
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.5.1
7
Answer:
1. Find the exact value of cos .
12
7
Solution. cos
= cos
+
= cos cos sin sin
12
4
3
3 4 3
4
2 1
2
3
2 6
=
=
2 2
2
2
4
2. Express
cos(5x) cos(2x) + sin(5x) sin(2x)
2
4
Answer: cos(3x)
PY
EP
E
C
O
1 2 30
cos( ).
Answer:
12
1
2 2
Solution. cos = and in QI = sin =
3
3
1
15
cos = and in QIII = sin =
4
4
cos ( ) = cos cos + sin sin
1
1
2 2
15
1 2 30
=
=
3
4
3
4
12
3.5.2. The Cofunction Identities and the Sine Sum and Difference
Identities
B = sin
B
2
2
2
cos B = sin
B .
2
193
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cos
B = sin B
sin
B = cos B
2
2
tan
B = cot B
2
C
O
Teaching Notes
The Cofunction
Identities for the
reciprocal
functions will
follow:
csc 2 B =
sec
B
sec 2 B =
csc
B
cot 2 B =
tan B.
PY
Cofunction Identities
Using the first two cofunction identities, we now derive the identity for sin(A+
B).
i
(A + B)
h2
i
= cos
A B)
2
= cos
A cos B + sin
A sin B
2
2
= sin A cos B + cos A sin B
h
EP
E
sin(A + B) = cos
In the last identity, replacing B with B and applying the even-odd identities
yield
sin(A B) = sin[A + (B)]
= sin A cos(B) + cos A sin(B)
= sin A cos B cos A sin B.
194
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
+
4
6
= sin
cos
+ cos
sin
4
6
6
4
2
3
2 1
=
2
2
2
2
6+ 2
=
4
= sin
C
O
PY
sin
5
12
3
and sin = 21 , where 0 < <
Example 3.5.4. If sin = 13
find sin( + ) and sin( ).
and
< < ,
2
p
4 10
3
2
=
cos = 1 sin = 1
13
13
EP
E
2
q
1
3
cos = 1 sin2 = 1
=
2
2
sin( + ) = sin cos + cos sin
!
3
4 10 1
3
=
13
2
13
2
4 10 3 3
=
26
!
1 4 10
3 3
=
2
13
2
13
4 10 + 3 3
=
26
195
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
EP
E
= sin
2
2 2
2
6 2
=
4
2. Find the exact value of sin 20 cos 80 sin 80 cos 20 .
6
4
3
Answer:
2
sin(x + y)
tan x + tan y
=
.
sin(x y)
tan x tan y
3. Prove:
3
= sin(60 ) = sin 60 =
2
Solution.
sin(x + y)
sin x cos y + cos x sin y
=
sin(x y)
sin x cos y cos x sin y
1
sin x cos y + cos x sin y cos x cos y
=
1
sin x cos y cos x sin y
cos x cos y
sin x cos y
cos x sin y
+
tan x + tan y
cos x cos y cos x cos y
=
=
sin x cos y
cos x sin y
tan x tan y
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cos A cos B
cos A cos B
tan A + tan B
=
.
1 tan A tan B
PY
tan(A + B) =
C
O
In the above identity, if we replace B with B and use the even-odd identity
tan() = tan , we get
EP
E
tan(A + B) =
Seatwork/Homework 3.5.3
1. Find the exact values of tan
5
12
, tan
12
, and tan 7
.
12
Answer: 2 + 3, 2 3, 2 + 3
197
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
tan 4 + tan 6
1 + 33
5
= 2+
Solution. tan
= tan
+
=
3
=
12
4
6
1 tan 4 tan 6
1 33
1 33
tan 4 tan 6
= 2
tan
3
= tan
=
=
12
4
6
1 + tan 4 tan 6
1 + 33
5
7
= tan
=2+ 3
tan
12
12
4
1 tan 4 tan
1 tan
tan 2 tan
= tan
tan(2 ) =
1 + tan 2 tan
cot A cot B 1
.
3. Prove: cot(A + B) =
cot A + cot B
1
1 tan A tan B
Solution. cot(A + B) =
=
tan(A + B)
tan A + tan B
1 tan A tan B cot A cot B
=
tan A + tan B cot A cot B
cot A cot B 1
=
cot A + cot B
Exercises 3.5
EP
E
(b) tan 12
2
9
sin
tan 20 + tan 25
1 tan 20 tan 25
sin
2
9
2 6
Answer:
4
Answer: 2 3
6 2
Answer:
4
Answer: 2 + 3
1
Answer:
2
Answer: 1
2. Given some information about a and b, find sin(a+b), cos(ab), and tan(a+b).
(a) sin a = 35 , cos b =
quadrant
12
,
13
56
63
56
; cos(a b) = ; tan(a + b) =
65
65
33
5
Solution. cos a = 45 , sin b = 13
Answer: sin(a + b) =
198
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3 13 2 39
3 39 2 13
Answer: sin(a + b) =
; cos(a b) =
; tan(a +
26
26
24 13 3
b) =
23
PY
10 34 3 714
6 34 5 714
Answer: sin(a + b) =
; cos(a b) =
;
170
170
375 + 68 28
tan(a + b) =
489
(b) tan(x + )
(c) sin
3
2
+x
(d) cos(x )
C
O
(a) cos( x)
Answer: tan x
Answer: cos x
Answer: cos x
Answer: cos x
EP
E
cos x sin y
+
sin x cos y
Solution. (cot x + tan y) sin x cos y =
sin x cos y
= cos x cos y + sin x sin y = cos(x y)
csc x csc y
(c) sec(x + y) =
cot x cot y 1
Solution.
sec(x + y) =
1
1
=
cos(x + y)
cos x cos y sin x sin y
1
=
1
sin x sin y
1
sin x sin y
199
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
=
=
(d)
1
sin x sin y
cos x cos ysin x sin y
sin x sin y
csc x csc y
cot x cot y 1
cos(x + y)
1 tan x tan y
=
cos(x y)
1 + tan x tan y
cos x cos y sin x sin y
cos(x + y)
=
Solution.
cos(x y)
cos x cos y + sin x sin y
1 tan x tan y
1 + tan x tan y
C
O
1
cos x cos y
1
cos x cos y
PY
EP
E
where Im and Vm are the maximum current (in amperes) and voltage (in volts),
respectively. Express this function as a product of two sine functions.
? 7. The force F (in pounds) on the back of a person when he or she bends over
sin(+90)
, where W is the
at an acute angle (in degrees) is given by F = 0.6Wsin
12
weight (in pounds) of the person.
(a) Simplify the formula for F .
(b) Find the force on the back of a person whose weight is 154.32 lbs if he
bends an angle of 40 .
(c) How many pounds should a person weigh for his back to endure a force
of 275 lbs if he bends 38 ?
200
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution
0.6W sin( + 90
0.6W cos
=
sin 12
sin 12
0.6(154.32) cos 40
(b) F =
340.46 lbs
sin 12
275 sin 12
F sin 12
=
(c) W =
121.17 lbs
0.6 cos
0.6 cos 38
xy
cos
.
8. (a) Prove: sin x + sin y = 2 sin x+y
2
2
(a) F () =
PY
where s(t) centimeters is the directed distance of the particle from the
origin at t seconds.
Solution
C
O
EP
E
we get
x+y
2
4
2+ 6
=
sin 4t +
4
2
2+ 6
2+ 6
(ii) s(t) =
sin 4t +
=
sin 4 t +
2
4
2
16
2+ 6
4
2
Amplitude =
; frequency =
=
2
2
and B =
Let A =
have
201
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
EP
E
http://cnx.org/contents/XGjYtByD@4/Lab-6-Analog-to-Digital-Conver
(a) Write the equation of the sound created by touching the * (asterisk) key
as a product of sine and cosine functions.
Solution
(b) Two atmospheric waves in space produce pressures of F (t) and G(t) pascals at t seconds, where
3
F (t) = 0.04 cos(2t) and G(t) = 0.04 cos 2t
.
4
Express the total pressure P (t) = F (t) + G(t) in the form
P (t) = a cos(bt + c).
202
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution
(a) Adding the identities
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B sin A sin B
cos(A B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B,
we get
x+y
2
xy
.
2
and B =
PY
Let A =
have
3
4
C
O
3
= 0.04 cos(2t) + 0.04 cos 2t
4
3
2t + 2t 4
2t 2t +
= 0.04 2 cos
cos
2
2
3
3
= 0.08 cos 2t
cos
8
8
q
3
= 0.04 2 2 cos 2t
8
EP
E
11. (a) In the figure, two intersecting lines have equations y = m1 x + b1 and
y = m2 x + b2 , respectively. Let be the acute angle between them, as
shown. Prove that
m2 m1
tan =
.
1 + m1 m2
(b) Two non-vertical lines intersect at the point (3, 2), and one angle between them measures 30 . If one line is 2y = x + 7, find the equation of
the other line.
203
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution
PY
(a) Let and be the angles between each line and the (positive side) x-axis,
as shown in the following diagram:
tan tan
m2 m1
=
.
1 + tan tan
1 + m1 m2
C
O
tan = tan( ) =
(b) Solve for m2 in the equation
tan 30 =
m2 12
,
1 + 21 m2
EP
E
and then use the point-slope form of the equation of the line to get
5 3+8
(x + 3) + 2.
y=
11
12. The length s() of the shadow cast by a vertical pole when the angle of the
sun with the horizontal is given by
s() =
h sin(90 )
,
sin
204
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
EP
E
C
O
205
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Outline
(1) The double-angle and half-angle identities for cosine, sine, and tangent
(2) More trigonometric identities
Introduction
PY
Trigonometric identities simplify the computations of trigonometric expressions. In this lesson, we continue on establishing more trigonometric
identities.
In particular, we derive the formulas for f (2) and f 12 , where f is the sine,
cosine, or tangent function.
C
O
EP
E
The double-identity for cosine has other forms. We use the Pythagorean
identity sin2 + cos2 = 1.
cos 2A = cos2 A sin2 A
= cos2 A (1 cos2 A)
= 2 cos2 A 1
cos 2A = cos2 A sin2 A
= (1 sin2 A) sin2 A
= 1 2 sin2 A
206
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3
5
and
cos 2A = 1 2 sin2 A
cos 2t = 1 2 sin2 t
2
3
=12
5
7
=
25
C
O
5
5
24
=
25
PY
Solution. We first find cos t using the Pythagorean identity. Since t lies in QII,
we have
s
2
p
4
3
2
= .
cos t = 1 sin t = 1
5
5
In the last example, we may compute cos 2t using one of the other two doubleangle identities for cosine. For the sake of answering the curious minds, we include
the computations here.
EP
E
5
5
7
=
25
cos 2t = 2 cos2 t 1
2
4
=2
1
5
7
=
25
Solution. We use the sum identity for sine, the double-angle identities for sine
and cosine, and the Pythagorean identity.
sin 3x = sin(2x + x)
= sin 2x cos x + cos 2x sin x
= (2 sin x cos x) cos x + (1 2 sin2 x) sin x
= 2 sin x cos2 x + sin x 2 sin3 x
= 2(sin x)(1 sin2 x) + sin x 2 sin3 x
= 3 sin x 4 sin3 x
207
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
For the double-angle formula for tangent, we recall the tangent sum identity:
tan(A + B) =
tan A + tan B
.
1 tan A tan B
When A = B, we obtain
tan(A + A) =
tan A + tan A
2 tan A
=
.
1 tan A tan A
1 tan2 A
PY
tan 2A =
C
O
Example 3.6.3. If tan = 13 and sec > 0, find sin 2, cos 2, and tan 2.
Solution. We can compute immediately tan 2.
2 13
3
2 tan
=
tan 2 =
2 =
2
1
1 tan
4
1 3
EP
E
From the given information, we deduce that lies in QIV. Using one Pythagorean
identity, we compute cos through sec . (We may also use the technique discussed in Lesson 3.2 by solving for x, y, and r.) Then we proceed to find cos 2.
s
2
p
1
10
2
sec = 1 + tan = 1 +
=
3
3
1
1
3 10
cos =
= =
10
sec
10
3
!2
3
10
4
cos 2 = 2 cos2 1 = 2
1=
10
5
tan 2 =
sin 2
3
= sin 2 = tan 2 cos 2 =
cos 2
5
Seatwork/Homework 3.6.1
1. If cos =
2
3
and
3
2
4 5
1
Answer: sin 2 =
, cos 2 = , tan 2 = 4 5
9
9
208
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: tan 3 =
2 tan
= sin 2.
1 + tan2
2 tan
2 tan
= 2 sin cos = sin 2
=
Solution.
1 + tan2
sec2
3 tan tan3
1 3 tan2
3. Prove:
PY
From these identities, we obtain two useful identities expressing sin2 A and cos2 A
in terms of cos 2A as follows:
1 + cos 2A
2
sin2 A =
and
1 cos 2A
.
2
C
O
cos2 A =
sin2 A =
cos2 A =
EP
E
and
A
,
2
A
2
1 cos 2A
2
we get
=
1 + cos A
2
1 cos 2 A2
A
1 cos A
sin
=
=
.
2
2
2
These are the half-angle identities for sine and cosine.
A
2
lies.
209
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.6.4. Find the exact values of sin 22.5 and cos 22.5 .
Solution.
PY
Solution. Clearly, 22.5 lies in QI (and so sin 22.5 and cos 22.5 are both positive), and 22.5 is the half-angle of 45 .
s
p
r
cos
45
2 2
2
=
=
sin 22.5 =
2
2
2
s
p
r
1
+
1
+
cos
45
2+ 2
2
=
=
2
cos 22.5 =
2
2
2
tan + sin
2
Example 3.6.5. Prove: cos
=
.
2
2 tan
1 + cos
cos
=
2
2
1 + cos tan
=
2
tan
tan + cos tan
=
2 tan
sin
tan + cos cos
=
2 tan
tan + sin
=
2 tan
EP
E
C
O
We now derive the first version of the half-angle formula for tangent.
tan
sin A2
A
=
2
cos A2
sin A2
=
cos A2
2 sin A2
2 sin A2
A
2 sin2 2
=
2 sin A2 cos A2
A
2 1cos
2
=
sin 2 A2
1 cos A
=
sin A
There is another version of the tangent half-angle formula, and we can derive
it from the first version.
A
1 cos A
tan =
2
sin A
210
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
=
=
=
=
1 cos A 1 + cos A
sin A
1 + cos A
2
1 cos A
(sin A)(1 + cos A)
sin2 A
(sin A)(1 + cos A)
sin A
1 + cos A
A
1 cos A
=
2
sin A
sin A2
A
tan =
2
cos A2
A
sin A
=
2
1 + cos A
A
1 cos A
tan2
=
2
1 + cos A
tan
C
O
tan
PY
.
Example 3.6.6. Find the exact value of tan 12
1 cos 6
1
=
tan
=
1
12
sin 6
2
3
2
=2
Solution.
EP
E
Example 3.6.7. If sin = 25 , cot > 0, and 0 < 2, find sin 2 , cos 2 , and
tan 2 .
. It follows
Solution. Since sin < 0 and cot > 0, we conclude the < < 3
2
that
3
< <
,
2
2
4
which means that 2 lies in QII.
s
2
p
2
21
cos = 1 sin2 = 1
=
5
5
v
u
p
r
u 1 21
5
1 cos t
50 + 10 21
sin =
=
=
2
2
2
10
v
u
p
r
u 1 + 21
t
5
1 + cos
50 10 21
cos =
=
=
2
2
2
10
1 521
1 cos
5 + 21
tan =
=
=
2
2
sin
2
25
211
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.6.2
1. Find the exact value of tan 8 .
2. If cos =
3
5
and
3
2
Answer:
5
,
5
21
cos 2 = 2 5 5 , tan 2 = 12
A
2 2 cos A
3. Prove: sec
=
.
2
sin2 A
A
1
2
2(1 cos A)
2 2 cos A
=
=
=
Solution. sec2 =
A
2
2
2
1 + cos A
1 cos A
sin2 A
cos 2
PY
Exercises 3.6
5
2
C
O
Answer: sin 2 =
Answer: sin 2 =
3
5
cos 2 = 87 , tan 2 =
15
7
cos 2 = 17
, tan 2 = 4 1721
25
< < 2
Answer: sin 2 = 45 , cos 2 = 35 , tan 2 =
4
3
EP
E
(d) sin =
3
2
4 21
,
25
15
,
8
Answer: sin 2 = 24
, cos 2 =
25
7
,
25
tan 2 = 24
7
2. Given the same information as in Item (1), where 0 < 2, find sin 2 , cos 2 ,
and tan 2 .
Answer:
(a) sin 2 =
(b) sin 2 =
(c) sin 2 =
(d) sin 2 =
6
15
,
tan
=
4
2
3
5010 5
50+10 5
, cos 2 =
,
10
10
3 10
, cos 2 = 1010 , tan 2 = 3
10
10
,
4
30
,
10
cos 2 =
tan 2 =
1 5
2
3. Express each expression as one trigonometric expression, but do not find the
exact value.
(a) 2 sin 10 cos 10
r
1 cos 7
6
(b)
2
Answer: sin 20
Answer: sin 7
12
212
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(c) 1 2 sin2
1 + cos 8
(d)
2
3
10
Answer: cos 3
5
Answer: cos2 4
PY
1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
Solution. tan2 =
=
2
1 + cos
1 + cos 1 cos
(1 cos )2
=
1 cos2
2
1 cos
=
= (csc cot )2
sin
EP
E
C
O
1 cos
sin
+
Solution. tan + cot =
2
2
sin
1 cos
(1 cos )2 + sin2
=
(sin )(1 cos )
1 2 cos + cos2 + sin2
=
(sin )(1 cos )
2 2 cos
2
=
=
= 2 csc
(sin )(1 cos )
sin
(c) sec2 2 = (csc2 )(2 2 cos )
1
2
Solution. sec2 =
=
2
1 + cos
cos2 2
2
1 cos
=
1 + cos 1 cos
2 2 cos
=
= (csc2 )(2 2 cos )
sin2
4a
4 a2
,
cos
2
=
4 + a2
4 + a2
2 a2
2 tan
2 tan
4a
=
=
=
2
2
2
sec
1 + tan
4 + a2
1 + a2
cos 2 = 2 cos2 1
2
2
2
4 a2
=
1
=
1
=
1
=
2
sec2
1 + tan2
4 + a2
1 + a2
213
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
1
2
Solution
=
=
=
=
C
O
1
2(cos 36 + cos 72 )
2 cos2 36 2 cos2 72
2(cos 36 + cos 72 )
(2 cos2 36 1) (2 cos2 72 1)
2(cos 36 + cos 72 )
PY
cos 36 cos 72 =
? 7. The range R of a projectile fired at an acute angle with the horizontal and
with an initial velocity of v meters per second is given by
R=
v2
sin(2),
g
where g is the acceleration due to gravity, which is 9.81 m/sec2 near the Earths
surface.
EP
E
(a) An archer targets an object 100 meters away from her position. If she
positions her arrow at an angle of 32 and releases the arrow at the speed
of 30 m/sec, will she hit her target?
Answer: No
2
30
Solution. R =
sin(2 32 ) 82.46 < 100
9.81
Answer: v 25.86 m/sec
(b) If sin = 52 , solve for v when R = 50.
2
21
Solution. sin = and acute angle = cos =
5
5
v2
2
21
50 =
2
= v 25.86
9.81
5
5
(c) Given v, find the value of that gives the largest possible range. At this
v2
, what is the range?
Answer: = 45 , largest R =
g
Solution. To reach the largest R, sin(2) must be 1.
8. The figure shows a laser scanner projection system. The optical angle , throw
distance D, and projected image width W are related by the equation
D=
W
2
csc cot
214
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: W = 2D tan 2
PY
C
O
https://pangolin.com/userhelp/scanangles.htm
2 2v 2
(sin cos ) cos ,
R=
g
EP
E
where g is the acceleration due to gravity in m/sec2 . Express this formula for
R in terms of 2.
2 2v 2
Solution. R =
(sin cos ) cos
g
2
2v
=
(2 sin cos 2 cos2 )
g
2
2v
=
[sin 2 (cos 2 + 1)]
g
2
2v
=
(sin 2 cos 2 1)
g
215
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Outline
PY
C
O
EP
E
In the previous lessons on functions (algebraic and trigonometric), we computed for the value of a function at a number in its domain. Now, given a value
in the range of the function, we reverse this process by finding a number in the
domain whose function value is the given one. Observe that, in this process,
the function involved may or may not give a unique number in the domain. For
example, each of the functions f (x) = x2 and g(x) = cos x do not give a unique
number in their respective domains for some values of each function. Given
f (x) = 1, the function gives x = 1. If g(x) = 1, then x = 2k, where k is an
integer. Because of this possibility, in order for the reverse process to produce a
function, we restrict this process to one-to-one functions or at least restrict the
domain of a non-one-to-one function to make it one-to-one so that the process
works. Loosely speaking, a function that reverses what a given function f does
is called its inverse function, and is usually denoted by f 1 .
Teaching Notes
The concept of
inverse function
was studied in
General
Mathematics
course.
216
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
All the trigonometric functions that we consider are periodic over their entire
domains. This means that all trigonometric functions are not one-to-one if we
consider their whole domains, which implies that they have no inverses over those
sets. But there is a way to make each of the trigonometric functions one-to-one.
This is done by restricting their respective domains. The restrictions will give us
well-defined inverse trigonometric functions.
C
O
The domain of the sine function is the set R of real numbers, and its range is
the closed interval [1, 1]. As observed in the previous lessons, the sine function
is not one-to-one, and the first step is to restrict its domain (by agreeing what the
convention is) with the following conditions: (1) the sine function is one-to-one
in that restricted domain, and (2) the range remains the same.
EP
E
y = sin1 x or y = arcsin x
if and only if
sin y = x,
where 1 x 1 and 2 y 2 .
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) arcsin 0 = 0
(4) sin1 12 = 6
As emphasized
1, sin1 x is that
in the last example, as long as 1 x1
number y 2 , 2 such that sin y = x. If |x| > 1, then sin x is not defined in
R.
PY
We can sometimes find the exact value of sin1 x (that is, we can find a value
in terms of ), but if no such special value exists, then we leave it in the form
sin1 x. For example, as shown above, sin1 12 is equal to 6 . However, as studied
in Lesson 3.2, no special number satisfies sin = 23 , so we leave sin1 32 as is.
Example 3.7.2. Find the exact value of each expression.
(1) sin sin1 12
(3) arcsin(sin )
C
O
Solution. (1) sin sin1 21 = sin 6 =
(2) arcsin sin 3 = arcsin 23 = 3
EP
E
To sketch the graph of y = sin1 x, Table 3.28 presents the tables of values
for y = sin x and y = sin1 x. Recall that the graphs of y = sin x and y = sin1 x
are symmetric with respect to the line y = x. This means that if a point (a, b) is
on y = sin x, then (b, a) is on y = sin1 x.
y = sin x
y = sin
x
y
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
6
12
21
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
Table 3.28
218
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) y = sin x
C
O
PY
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted sine function y = sin x is shown
in Figure 3.29(a), while the graph of inverse sine function y = arcsin x is shown
in Figure 3.29(b).
(b) y = sin1 x
Figure 3.29
EP
E
219
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution 2. In this solution, we graph first the corresponding sine function, and
then use the symmetry with respect to y = x to graph the inverse function.
y = sin1 (x + 1) sin y = x + 1 x = sin y 1
PY
C
O
EP
E
Teaching Notes
Keep in mind that,
because of the
restriction in the
domain, we have
the following:
sin(sin1 x) = x
for all x [1, 1].
But sin1 (sin x) is
not always x. We
have
sin1 (sin x) = x
only if
2 x 2 .
Seatwork/Homework 3.7.1
(a) sin1 1
(b) arcsin 22
(c) arcsin 23
(d) sin1 23
1 2
(e) sin sin
2
Answer: 2
Answer:
Answer: 3
Answer:
2
2
Answer:
Answer:
Answer: 3
220
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
(a) y = sin1 (x 2)
EP
E
221
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Teaching Notes
Observe that this
definition of
cos1 x is
equivalent to
cos1 x =
sin1 x.
2
EP
E
C
O
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted cosine function y = cos x is
shown in Figure 3.30(a), while the graph of inverse cosine function y = arccos x
is shown in Figure 3.30(b).
(b) y = cos1 x
(a) y = cos x
Figure 3.30
(6) sin cos1
2
2
[0, ].
222
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
= 23 because 23 [1, 1]
(3) cos cos1 23
(4) cos1 cos 3
=
4
because 3
[0, ].
4
(5) arccos cos 7
=
arccos
23 = 5
6
6
2
2
3
4
2
2
Example 3.7.5. Simplify: sin arcsin 23 + arccos 21 .
C
O
PY
Solution. We know that arccos 12 = 3 . Using the Sine Sum Identity, we have
sin arcsin 32 + arccos 12
= sin arcsin 23 + 3
= sin arcsin 23 cos 3 + cos arcsin 23 sin 3
= 23 21 + cos arcsin 23 23
= 13 + 23 cos arcsin 23 .
We compute cos arcsin 23 . Let = arcsin 23 . By definition, sin = 23 , where
lies in QI. Using the Pythagorean identity, we have
p
cos arcsin 32 = cos = 1 sin2 = 35 .
EP
E
sin arcsin 32 + arccos 12 = 13 + 23 cos arcsin 32
=
3
1
+
3
2
2+ 15
.
6
5
3
Solution. Let = cos1 45 . Then cos = 54 . Because cos < 0 and range
of inverse
cosine function is [0, ], we know that must be within the interval
223
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
1
cos1 (2x) 4y = cos1 (2x) x = cos(4y)
4
2
EP
E
C
O
PY
We graph first y = 12 cos(4x). The domain of this graph comes from the restriction
of cosine as follows:
0 4x = 0 x .
4
Then reflect this graph with respect to y = x, and we finally obtain the graph of
y = 41 cos1 (2x) (solid line).
In the last example, we may also use the following technique. In graphing
y = 14 cos1 (2x), the horizontal length of cos1 x is reduced to half, while the
vertical height is reduced to quarter. This comparison technique is shown in
the graph below with the graph of y = cos1 x in dashed line and the graph of
y = 41 cos1 (2x) in solid line.
224
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.7.2
1. Find the exact value of each expression.
(a) cos1 (1)
(b) arccos 22
(c) arccos sin 5
2
Answer:
Answer:
Answer: 0
2
Answer: 52
3
Answer: 0
PY
3
4
4
13
3
Answer:
4 2 5
sin
Answer:
(a) cos
9
2
=
and
in
Solution. Let = cos1 32 . This implies that cos
3
5
QI. Using a Pythagorean
identity, one gets sin = 3 . Similarly, let
1
1
= sin
3 .This implies that sin = 13 and in QIV. Then,
we get cos = 2 3 2 .
We now use Cosine Difference Identity, and the given and computed
values to simplify the expression.
1
1
1 2
sin
cos cos
= cos( )
3
3
!
!
2
2 2
5
1
4 2 5
= cos cos + sin sin =
+
=
.
3
3
3
3
9
13
EP
E
C
O
cos1 32
17 3 4 21
(b) tan arcsin
+ arccos
Answer:
9
1
12
2
5
3
21
+
3
2
( 3 3 )( 221 )
17 3 4 21
=
9
225
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
(b) y = 12 cos1 (x + 2)
C
O
PY
The inverse tangent function is similarly defined as inverse sine and inverse cosine
functions.
y = tan1 x or y = arctan x
means
tan y = x,
where x R and 2 < y < 2 .
226
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) y = tan1 x
C
O
(a) y = tan x
PY
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted function y = tan x is shown
in Figure 3.31(a), while the graph of inverse function y = arctan x is shown in
Figure 3.31(b).
Figure 3.31
EP
E
Solution. Note the range of arctan is the open interval 2 , 2 .
(1) tan1 1 =
(2) arctan 3 = 3
(3) tan tan1 52 = 25
(4) tan1 tan 6 = 6 because 6 2 , 2 .
(5) Here, note that 7
6 2 , 2 . Use the idea of reference angle, we know that
6
tan 7
= tan 6 .
6
7
1
1
tan
tan
= tan
tan
=
6
6
6
(6) Here, we cannot use the idea of reference angle, but the idea can help in a
way. The number (or angle) 19
is in QII, wherein tangent is negative, and
6
227
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
=
6
Example 3.7.9. Findthe exact value of each expression.
(2) tan sin1 53 tan1 14
(1) sin 2 tan1 38
PY
Solution. (1) Let = tan1 38 . Then tan = 83 . Following the notations in
Lesson 3.2 and the definition of inverse tangent
know that lies
p function, we
2
2
in QIV, and x = 3 and y = 8. We get r = 3 + (8) = 73.
C
O
3
= 2 sin cos
y x
=2
r r
8
3
= 2
73
73
48
= .
73
EP
E
3
4
228
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
and
9
tan = .
6
C
O
tan =
tan + tan
1 tan tan
1
+9
= 6 169
1 6 6
20
= .
9
Using a calculator, the viewing angle is = tan1
EP
E
tan = tan( + ) =
20
9
65.8 .
tan1 x.
2
It follows that the domain of y = cot1 x is R and its range is (0, ).
cot1 x =
y = sec1 x or y = arcsec x
2
Teaching Notes
Keep in mind that
the domain
restrictions are
conventions we set.
Other books and
sources might have
different domain
restrictions. The
restrictions we
made aim to make
calculus
computations
easier in the future.
means
sec y = x,
3
where |x| 1 and y 0, 2 , 2 .
229
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Define
sec1 x.
2
This means that thedomainof y = csc1 x is (, 1] [1, ) and
its range is , 2 0, 2 .
csc1 x =
C
O
PY
The graphs of these last three inverse trigonometric functions are shown in
Figures 3.32, 3.33, and 3.34, respectively.
(a) y = cot x
(b) y = cot1 x
EP
E
Figure 3.32
(b) y = sec1 x
(a) y = sec x
Figure 3.33
230
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 3.34
PY
(b) y = csc1 x
(a) y = csc x
[1, 1]
EP
E
sin1 x
Domain
Function
C
O
Observe that the process in getting the value of an inverse function is the
same to all inverse functions. That is, y = f 1 (x) is the same as f (y) = x. We
need to remember the range of each inverse trigonometric function. Table 3.35
summarizes all the information about the six inverse trigonometric functions.
Range
Graph
2, 2
Figure
3.29(b)
[1, 1]
[0, ]
tan1 x
2 , 2
cot1 x
(0, )
sec1 x
{x : |x| 1}
3
0, 2 , 2
csc1 x
{x : |x| 1}
cos1 x
, 2 0, 2
Figure
3.30(b)
Figure
3.31(b)
Figure
3.32(b)
Figure
3.33(b)
Figure
3.34(b)
Table 3.35
3
2 3
1
3
1
1
(2) csc
3
(4) sin sec
2 csc
233
231
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4
3
because sec 4
= 2 and
3
4
3
, 3
2
5
6
3
1
.
Let
=
sec
. Then
(4) From (2), we know that csc1 2 3 3 = 2
3
2
sec = 32 . From defined range of inverse secant function and the notations
in Lesson
and r = 3 and x = 2. Solving for y, we get
p 3.2, lies in QIII,
2
2
y = 3 (2) = 5. It follows that sin = 35 and cos = 23 .
!
3
2
EP
E
C
O
PY
= sin
sin sec
2
3
3
2
= sin +
3
2
2
= sin cos
+ cos sin
3
3
!
2
5
1
=
+
3
2
3
52 3
=
6
Seatwork/Homework 3.7.3
Answer:
Answer: 4
(b) arctan(1)
5
Answer:
Answer: 10
Answer: 0
Answer: 83
6 10 + 210
Answer:
50
Solution. Let = arcsec 52 and = arccot 3. These imply that sec =
5
and cot = 3, where
and are
both in QI. Weobtain the following:
2
21
3 10
2
cos = 5 , sin = 5 , cos = 10 , and sin = 1010 .
(a) cos arcsec 52 arccot 3
232
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Using Cosine Difference Identity and the above values, we simplify the
expression as follows:
5
arccot 3) = cos cos + sin sin
2
!
! !
2
3 10
21
10
=
+
5
10
5
10
6 10 + 210
=
50
1
5
7
(b) tan tan1
+ tan1
Answer:
2
3
11
Solution
1
1 5
1
+
tan
tan
tan
tan
1
5
2
3
tan tan1
+ tan1
=
2
3
1 tan tan1 21 tan tan1 53
PY
cos(arcsec
Exercises 3.7
EP
E
(c) tan1 3
Answer: 6
Answer:
Answer: 2
Answer: 4
3
3
Answer: 4
Answer:
(d) csc1 1
Answer: Undefined
(g) csc1
12 + 35
7
5 =
1
11
1 2 3
C
O
=
? 2. Find the value of each expression using a calculator. Round your answer to
two decimal places.
(a) sin1 (1/3)
Answer: 0.34
Answer: 1.98
Answer: 1.56
Answer: 0.96
Answer: 1.72
Answer: 0.95
233
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
Answer: undefined
Answer:
Answer:
Answer:
5
3
3
Answer: 33
65
Answer: 12
Answer: t = tan1
(b) x = 2 tan(t + 1)
(c) x = 21 cos(2t + 1)
EP
E
(d) x = 2 23 sec(1 t)
1
2
Answer: undefined
Answer: t = 13 sin1 x
(a) x = sin 3t
(e) x =
Answer: 1
C
O
Answer: 1
PY
(a) sin sin1 12 + cos1 21
1
1
(b) cos tan
3 + sin
23
cot(2 3t)
x
2
cos1 (2x)1
2
1 2
Answer: t = 1 sec
(2
x)
3
2
1
1 1
Answer: t = 3 3 cot
x
2
Answer: t =
(a) y = cos1 (x + 1)
234
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(b) y = sin1 (x 2)
EP
E
C
O
(c) y = sin1 2x
x
2
(d) y = cos1
235
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
EP
E
PY
(e) y = 2 cos1 (x 1)
236
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
Answer: x = 1
Answer: 2, 43
EP
E
(b) Find another day of that year whose number of hours of daylight is the
same as that of February 29.
Answer: 287 days, so the day would be October 13
? 11. After getting a job, a man started saving a percentage of his annual income,
which can be modeled by
P (t) = 2.5 cos(0.157t) + 5.2,
where P (t) is the percentage of his annual income that he was able to save on
year t after he got a job.
(a) What percentage of his annual income did he save on the second year?
Answer: 7.58% of his annual income
237
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) On what year right after getting a job did he save the least?
Answer: 20 years after getting a job
(c) On what year right after getting a job did he save the most? When would
it happen again?
Answer: 40 years after getting a job
(d) If he got his job at the age of 20, how much will he save on the year of
his retirement (that is, when he is 60)?
Answer: 7.7% of his annual
income
12. Prove each identity.
2x
,
1+4x2
1
C
O
PY
1+x
(a) cos (tan1 x) = 1+x
2 , x R
Solution. Let = tan1 x, where x is any real number. This implies that
tan = x. One can think of a right triangle, with acute angle whose
opposite side is x and adjacent side as 1. Solving for the hypotenuse,
adjacent side
1
1+x2
= 1+x
we get 1 + x2 . Thus cos =
. But
2 =
1+x2
hypotenuse
1+x2
= tan1 x, therefore, cos(tan1 x) = 1+x
2 .
xR
EP
E
Solution. Let = tan 2x, where x is any real number. This implies that
tan = 2x. One can think of a right triangle, with acute angle whose
opposite side is 2x and adjacent side as 1. Solving for the hypotenuse, we
opposite side
2x
1
= 1+4x
2x,
get 1 + 4x2 . Thus sin =
2 . But = tan
hypotenuse
2x
therefore, sin(tan1 2x) = 1+4x
2.
=
+
1 + x2
1 + x2
1 + x2
1 + x2
x2 + 1
=
= 1.
1 + x2
1
x
= 2 .
238
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
sin( + )
sin cos + cos sin
x(x) + ( 1 x2 )( 1 x2 )
x2 + 1 x2
1.
PY
sin(sin1 x + cos1 x) =
=
=
=
=
EP
E
2 , 2 . However, if we consider the entire domain (not the restricted domain)
of the sine function, which is the set R of real numbers, there are solutions (other
than 6 ) of the equation sin x = 21 . This current lesson explores the techniques of
solving (conditional) trigonometric equations.
We divide the lesson into two groups of equations: the ones using a basic way
of solving, and those using more advanced techniques.
3.8.1. Solutions of a Trigonometric Equation
PY
C
O
1
2
(2) tan x = 1
(3) 3 sec x = 2 3
(4) 3| cot x| = 1
(1) sin x =
Solution. Note that the choices (except 2) are numbers within the interval [0, ].
To quickly determine which numbers among the choices are solutions to a particular equation, we use some distinctive properties of the possible solutions.
Teaching Notes
In the process of
showing that a
number is a
solution of an
equation, note that
we cannot assume
yet that it is a
solution. This
means that we
cannot use the
equality sign yet in
the process.
EP
E
Teaching Notes
The word
solution has two
meanings in our
discussion. One is
a process of solving
a problem, and the
other is a number
that makes an
equation true. The
intended meaning
depends on the
context of its
usage.
Teaching Notes
In the actual
classroom
discussion, you
may only choose
some of these
items.
(1) The sine function is positive on (0, ). From Lesson 3.2, we recall that 6 is
an obvious solution. We may imagine the graph of y = sin x. We may also
use the idea of reference angle. Thus, among the choices, only 6 and 5
are
6
1
the only solutions of sin x = 2 .
(2) Since tan x = 1 > 0, any
solution of the equation among the choices must
be in the interval 0, 2 (that is, in QI). Again, among the choices, the only
solution to tan x = 1 is 4 .
240
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) Here, the given equation is equivalent to sec x = 2 3 3 . Among the choices,
.
the only solution of the equation 3 sec x = 2 3 is 5
6
(4) Eliminating
the absolute
value sign, the given equation is equivalent tocot x =
3
3
or cot x = 3 . Among the choices, the only solution of cot x = 33 is 3 ,
3
.
Thus,
the
only
solutions
of
while the other equation has 2
3| cot x| = 1
3
from the given set are 3 and 2
.
3
PY
(5) The given equation is one of the Pythagorean Identities (page 182). It means
that all numbers in the domain of the equation are solutions. The domain
of the equation is R \ {x : cos x = 0}. Thus, all except 2 are solutions of
sec2 x tan2 x = 1.
Teaching Notes
For convenience in
showing or finding
a solution of an
equation, we may
use an equivalent
equation. By
definition, the
solutions of the
equivalent equation
are exactly the
same as the
solutions of the
original equation.
C
O
(6) For the sum of sin x and cos x to be 0, they must have equal absolute values
satisfies these properties, and
but different signs. Among the choices, only 3
4
it is the only solution of sin x + cos x = 0.
(7) This equations is one of the Double-Angle Identities for Cosine. This means
that all numbers in the domain of the equation are its solutions. Because the
domain of the given equation is R, all numbers in the given set are solutions
of cos2 x = cos 2x + sin2 x.
(8) We substitute each number in the choices to the expression on the left-side
of the equation, and select those numbers that give resulting values equal to
1.
EP
E
x = 4 : sin 4 + cos 2( 4 ) =
x = 3 : sin 3 + cos 2( 3 ) =
1
+ 12 = 1
2
2
2
+
0
=
2
2
3
31
1
=
2
2
2
x = 2 : sin 2 + cos 2( 2 ) = 1 1 = 0
2
:
3
sin 2
+ cos 2( 2
)=
3
3
x=
3
:
4
5
:
6
sin 3
+ cos 2( 3
)=
4
4
x=
x=
sin 5
+ cos 2( 5
)=
6
6
3
31
1
=
2
2
2
2
+ 0 = 22
2
1
+ 12 = 1
2
x = : sin + cos 2 = 0 + 1 = 1
Teaching Notes
If one side of an
equation is
constant and if the
non-constant
expression is a bit
complicated, the
basic method of
showing that a
number is a
solution of the
equation is more
appropriate; that
is, to start on the
non-constant side,
then substitute the
number to the
variable, simplify
the expression, and
end on the value of
the constant on the
other side.
32 3
3
2
:
3
x=
5
:
6
2 sin 2
+ tan 2
2 cos 2
=1
3
3
3
: 2 sin 3
+ tan 3
2 cos 3
=2 21
x = 3
4
4
4
4
x = : 2 sin + tan 2 cos = 2
3+2 3
3
PY
2 sin 5
+ tan 5
2 cos 5
=
6
6
6
C
O
Thus, the only solution of 2 sin x + tan x 2 cos x = 2 from the given set is .
(10) This equation has no solution because one of the Pythagorean Identities says
sin2 x + cos2 x = 1.
3
;
2
sin 6 =
1
2
EP
E
x = 6 : sin 2( 6 ) =
x = 4 : sin 2( 4 ) = 1; sin 4 =
x = 3 : sin 2( 3 ) =
3
;
2
2
2
sin 3 =
3
2
x = 2 : sin 2( 2 ) = 0; sin 2 = 1
x=
3
:
4
sin 2( 3
) = 1; sin 3
=
4
4
x=
5
:
6
sin 2( 5
)=
6
If both sides of an
equation are both
non-constant
expressions, one
method of showing
that a number is a
solution of the
equation is to
substitute the
number to both
expressions (but
never join them
with equality sign
because they are
not yet equal
logically), and
check if the
resulting values are
equal.
(11) We substitute each number in the given set to the expression of each side of
the equation, and see which resulting values are equal.
Teaching Notes
3
;
2
sin 3 =
2
2
1
2
x = : sin 2 = 0; sin = 0
x = 2: sin 2(2) = 0; sin 2 = 0
Thus, among the numbers in the given set, the solutions of sin 2x = sin x are
0, 3 , , and 2.
242
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2 tan 0 + 4 sin 0 = 0
2 + sec 0 = 3
2 tan 6 + 4 sin 6 =
2 + sec 6 =
x=
x=
2 3+6
3
2 3+6
3
2 tan 4 + 4 sin 4 = 2 2 + 2
2 + sec 4 = 2 + 2
2 tan 3 + 4 sin 3 = 4 3
2 + sec 3 = 4
x=
2
3
3
4
x=
5
6
: 2 tan 3
+ 4 sin 3
=2 22
4
4
2 + sec 3
=
2
2
4
: 2 tan 5
+ 4 sin 5
=
6
6
2 + sec 5
=
6
2 tan + 4 sin = 0
EP
E
x=:
62 3
3
62 3
3
x=
C
O
x=
PY
x=
2 + sec = 1
x = 2 : 2 tan 2 + 4 sin 2 = 0
2 + sec 2 = 3
After checking the equal values, the solutions of 2 tan x + 4 sin x = 2 + sec x
among the given choices are 6 , 2
, and 5
.
2
3
6
Seatwork/Homework 3.8.1
In each equation, list down its solutions from the set 3 , 4 , 6 , 4 , 2
, , 3
.
3
2
(1)
3 sec = 2
Answer:
Answer: 4 ,
Answer: 3 ,
Answer:
2 3
, 2
3
243
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(1) equivalent equations (that is, equations that have the same solutions as the
original equation);
(2) periodicity of the trigonometric function involved;
(3) inverse trigonometric function;
C
O
(4) values of the trigonometric function involved on the interval [0, ] or [0, 2]
(depending on the periodicity of the function); and
(5) Zero-Factor Law: ab = 0 if and only if a = 0 or b = 0.
EP
E
On the interval [0, 2], there are only two solutions of the last equation, and these
are x = 3 (this is in QI) and x = 5
(in QIV).
3
Because the period of cosine function is 2, the complete solutions of the
equation are x = 3 + k(2) and x = 5
+ k(2) for all integers k.
2
3
Teaching Notes
Any particular
solution in a family
of solutions can be
used as a seed
solution to
produce the other
solutions in the
family.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
tan 1 = 0
or
cos = 1
tan = 1
= + 2k, k Z
+ k, k Z.
+ k for all
2
PY
Example 3.8.4. Find all values of x in the interval [2, 2] that satisfy the
equation (sin x 1)(sin x + 1) = 0.
Solution.
sin x = 1
x=
or
or
sin x + 1 = 0
sin x = 1
C
O
sin x 1 = 0
3
2
Solutions:
x=
,
2
3
,
2
3
2
3
,
2
or
EP
E
From the above particular solutions, we can produce all solutions of cos x =
0.1, and these are x = cos1 0.1+2k and x = cos1 0.1+2k for all k Z. 2
Example 3.8.6. Solve: 3 tan + 5 = 0.
Solution.
3 tan + 5 = 0
tan = 35
? Example 3.8.7. The voltage V (in volts) coming from an electricity distributing company is fluctuating according to the function V (t) = 200 + 170 sin(120t)
at time t in seconds.
245
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
sin1 100
170
0.00167 seconds
120
PY
t=
100
170
C
O
(2) The maximum value of V (t) happens when and only when the maximum
value of sin(120t) is reached. We know that the maximum value of sin(120t)
is 1, and it follows that the maximum value of V (t) is 370 volts. Thus, we
need to solve for all values of t such that sin(120t) = 1.
EP
E
sin(120t) = 1
+ 2k
t= 2
120
1
+ 2k
t= 2
0.00417 + 0.017k
120
This means that the voltage is maximum when t 0.00417 + 0.017k for each
nonnegative integer k.
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.8.2
Answer: 4 + k, k Z
(a) tan x = 1
(b) sin x =
1
2
Answer:
+ 2k,
5
6
+ 2k, k Z
Answer: 2k, 4 + k, k Z
2. Find all values of the variable in the interval [2, 2] that satisfy the given
equation.
Answer: 2 , 3
, 0, , 2, , 2
2
Answer: 2
, 4
, 4
, 2
3
3
3
3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Solution.
2 cos x = 0
cos x = 0
C
O
tan x 1 = 0
or
tan x = 1
x = 4 + k,
kZ
x = 2 + 2k or
x = 3
+ 2k,
2
kZ
Solutions:
+ 2k,
3
2
+ 2k,
+ k, k Z
Teaching Notes
The method for
solving
trigonometric
equations follows
the usual way of
solving nonlinear
equations; that is,
transform the
equation so that
one side is 0, and
then factor.
EP
E
sin 2x = sin x
sin 2x sin x = 0
2 cos x 1 = 0
or
x = 0 or x =
cos x =
x=
Solutions: 0, ,
5
, 3
3
1
2
or x =
5
3
247
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Solution.
2 cos2 x = 1 + sin x
EP
E
Pythagorean Identity
2 sin2 x + sin x 1 = 0
(2 sin x 1)(sin x + 1) = 0
2 sin x 1 = 0
sin x =
x=
Factoring
or
sin x + 1 = 0
1
2
or x =
sin x = 1
5
6
x=
Solutions:
3
2
5 3
, 6, 2
6
Pythagorean Identity
(3 sin x + 1)(sin x 1) = 0
Factoring
248
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3 sin x + 1 = 0
sin x 1 = 0
or
sin x = 13
sin x = 1
x = sin1 ( 31 ) + 2
or
x = sin1 ( 13 )
x=
C
O
PY
One part of the last solution needs further explanation. In the equation
) (which
sin x = 31 , we expect two solutions in the interval [0, 2): one in (, 3
2
3
is QIII), and another in ( 2 , 2) (which is QIV). Since no special number satisfies
sin x = 13 , we use inverse sine function. Because the range of sin1 is [ 2 , 2 ], we
know that 2 < sin1 ( 13 ) < 0. From this value, to get the solution in ( 3
, 2),
2
1
1
we simply add 2 to this value, resulting to x = sin ( 3 ) + 2. On the other
hand, to get the solution in (, 3
), we simply add sin1 ( 31 ) to , resulting to
2
x = sin1 ( 13 ).
Example 3.8.12. Solve: sin2 x + 5 cos2
Teaching Notes
Using the reference
angle of sin1 ( 31 ),
we get two
solutions (QIII and
QIV), and these
are + sin1 ( 13 )
and 2 sin1 ( 31 ).
Solution.
x
= 2.
2
Teaching Notes
Using the
Odd-Even Identity,
sin1 ( 31 ) =
sin1 ( 13 ).
x
sin2 x + 5 cos2 = 2
2
1 + cos x
2
sin x + 5
=2
2
EP
E
2 sin2 x + 5 cos x + 1 = 0
(2 cos x + 1)(cos x 3) = 0
2 cos x + 1 = 0
cos x 3 = 0
or
cos x = 12
cos x = 3
x = 2
+ 2k or
3
4
x = 3 + 2k,
kZ
Solutions:
2
3
no solution
+ 2k,
4
3
+ 2k, k Z
Solution.
tan 2x 2 cos x = 0
sin 2x
2 cos x = 0
cos 2x
sin 2x 2 cos x cos 2x = 0
Apply the Double-Angle Identities for Sine and Cosine, and then factor.
2 cos x = 0
x = 2 or
x = 3
2
2 sin x 1 = 0
sin x =
1
2
or
sin x + 1 = 0
sin x = 1
C
O
cos x = 0
or
PY
x = 6 or
x = 5
6
x=
3
2
These values of x should be checked in the original equation because tan 2x may
not be defined. Upon checking, this is not the case for each value of x obtained.
, 6 , 5
, and 3
.
2
The solutions are 2 , 3
2
6
2
EP
E
where f (t) centimeters is the directed distance of the weight from its central
position at t seconds, and the positive distance means above its central position.
(1) At what time is the displacement of the weight 5 cm below its central
position for the first time?
(2) For what values of t does the weight reach its farthest point below its central
position?
Solution. (1) We find the least positive value of t such that f (t) = 5.
20 cos 45 t 56 = 5
cos 45 t 56 = 41
There are two families of solutions for this equation.
250
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
t=
5
6
5
= cos1 14
6
cos1 ( 14 )+2k
4
+ 2k, k Z
5
4
t=
5
6
5
= 2 cos1
6
2cos1 ( 14 )+2k
4
14 + 2k, k Z
PY
C
O
5
Therefore, the first time that the displacement of the weight is 5 cm below
its central position is at about 0.1078 seconds.
EP
E
(2) The minimum value of f (t) happens when and only when the minimum
value of cos 45 t 56 is reached. The minimum value of cos 54 t 56 is
1, which implies that the farthest point the weight can reach below its
central position
is 20 cm. Thus, we need to solve for all values of t such that
cos 54 t 65 = 1.
cos 45 t 56 = 1
5
4
+2k
4
25
12
+ 52 k
t=
Therefore, the weight reaches its farthest point (which is 20 cm) below its
25
central position at t = 12
+ 52 k for every integer k 0.
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.8.3
1. Solve each equation.
+ 2k, k Z
Answer:
7
6
+ 2k,
11
6
Answer:
+ 2k,
+ 2k, + 2k, k Z
251
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: 6 + 2k,
(a) 2 sin x + 1 = 0
PY
(c) tan x + 1 = 0
Answer:
(e) tan 4x 1 = 0
(f) sec x 1 = 0
+ k, k Z
1
(4k
16
+ 1), k Z
Answer: k, k Z
Answer:
2
3
+ 2k,
4
3
+ 2k, k Z
+ 2k, 2k, k Z
+ 3 = 7 tan x2
Answer: 2 tan1 13 + 2k, 2 tan1 23 + 2k, k Z
x
2
=1
C
O
Answer:
(j) 6 sec2
3
4
(d) cos 3x = 0
x
2
+ 2k, k Z
Answer: k, k Z
7
6
EP
E
5 7 11
, 6, 6, 6
6
Answer: 3 , 5
3
5
Answer: 4 , 4
Answer: 6 , 3 , 7
, 4
6
3
2 4 5
Answer: 3 , 3 , 3 , 3
Answer: 7
, 11
6
6
3
Answer: 2
, cos1 34 , 2 cos1 34
Answer: 0, 3 , 5
3
11
Answer: 6
Answer:
(d) 2 sin 2x = 3
(e) sec2 x 4 = 0
Answer: 0,
(b) cot 4x 1 = 0
Answer: 45
Answer: 11.25 , 56.25 , 101.25 , 146.25
252
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: 0 , 120
PY
where f (t) centimeters is the directed distance of the weight from its central position at t seconds, and the positive distance means above its central
position.
(a) Find the times when the weight is at its central position.
Solution. We solve the equation f (t) = 0.
C
O
EP
E
sin(3.8t 2.1) = 1
3
3.8t 2.1 =
+ 2k where k is a whole number
2
3+4k
+ 2.1
2
t =
where k is a whole number
3.8
(3 + 4k) + 4.2
t =
where k is a whole number
7.6
t 1.79 + 1.65k where k is a whole number
Therefore, the weight reaches it farthest point below the central position
at t 1.79 + 1.65k seconds (where k is a whole number). For instance,
at t = 1.79 s, t = 3.44 s, t = 5.09 s, etc.
253
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
s(0) =
=
=
=
C
O
The weekly sales of the car company at the start of the study is approximately 27.32 million pesos.
(b) Find the projected maximum and minimum weekly sales of the company.
Solution. The projected maximum and minimum weekly sales of the
company are attained when the cosine values are 1 and 1, respectively.
Thus, the maximum weekly sales is 12.18 + 20.40 = 32.58 million pesos,
and the minimum weekly sales is 12.18 + 20.40 = 8.22 million pesos.
EP
E
(c) If the company were able to reach its maximum sales this week, when
will the next projected maximum weekly sales and upcoming projected
minimum weekly sales be?
Solution. The next projected maximum weekly sales will be attained after
2
7.14. Hence, if the company were able
one period. That is, P = 0.88
to reach its maximum sales this week, then the next projected maximum
weekly sales will be after about 7 weeks.
On the other hand, the upcoming minimum weekly sales is projected after
2
3.57. Hence, if the company were
half the period. That is, 12 P = 12 0.88
able to reach its maximum sales this week, then the upcoming projected
minimum weekly sales will be after about 3.5 weeks.
(d) After the start of the study, when did the company experience a weekly
sales of only 10 million for the first time?
Solution. Here, we want to solve s(t) = 10 for the least nonnegative value
of t.
12.18 cos(0.88t 7.25) + 20.40 = 10
520
cos(0.88t 7.25) =
609
254
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
We get
0.88t 7.25 = cos
520
+ 2k, k Z
609
t 11.19 + 7.14k
or
1
520
609
+ 2k
t 5.29 + 7.14k.
PY
C
O
? 6. After many years in business, the financial analyst of a shoe company projected
that the monthly costs of producing their products and monthly revenues from
the sales of their products are fluctuating according to the following formulas:
C(t) = 2.6 + 0.58 sin(0.52t 7.25)
and
EP
E
where C(t) and R(t) are the costs and revenues in million of pesos at month t
(t = 0 represents January 2010). About how many months after January 2010
did the company experience a zero profit for the first time?
Solution. The profit is zero when the revenue is the same as the cost.
The company experienced zero profit for the first time about 16.37+6.04(2)
4.29 or 4 months after January 2010.
7. If x be a real number such that
cos 2x =
2
3
and
1
cos x sin x = ,
2
Solution.
cos 2x =
cos2 x sin2 x =
(cos x + sin x)(cos x sin x) =
1
=
(cos x + sin x)
2
PY
cos x + sin x =
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
8 sin2 x
0
0
0
1
sin x =
2
5
x = ,
6
6
=
=
=
=
EP
E
C
O
16 sin4 x + 1
16 sin4 x 8 sin2 x + 1
(4 sin2 x 1)2
4 sin2 x 1
3
3
3
8
3
sin cos + cos sin + sin cos cos sin =
3
3
3
3
8
3
2 sin cos =
3
8
3
3 cos =
8
sin
+ + sin
= cos1
!
3
8
256
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
sin B + 3 cos A = 2.
Prove that C = 30 .
Solution.
3 sin A + cos B = 3
3 cos A + sin B = 2
PY
C
O
9 + 6 sin(A + B) + 1 = 13
6 sin(A + B) = 3
1
sin(A + B) =
2
A + B = 30 , 150
EP
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
C
O
PY
C
O
PY
In the polar coordinate system, a point is described by the ordered pair (r, ).
The radial coordinate r refers to the directed distance of the point from the pole.
The angular coordinate refers to a directed angle (usually in radians) from the
polar axis to the segment joining the point and the pole.
EP
E
259
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.9.1. Plot the following points in one polar plane: A(3, 3 ), B(1, 5
),
6
7
19
7
17
17
5
C(2, 6 ), D(4, 12 ), E(3, ), F (4, 6 ), G(2.5, 4 ), H(4, 6 ), and I(3, 3 ).
EP
E
C
O
PY
Solution.
As seen in the last example, unlike in Cartesian plane where a point has a
unique Cartesian coordinate representation, a point in polar plane have infinitely
many polar coordinate representations. For example, the coordinates (3, 4) in
the Cartesian plane refer to exactly one point in the plane, and this particular
point has no rectangular coordinate representations other than (3, 4). However,
the coordinates (3, 3 ) in the polar plane also refer to exactly one point, but
this point has other polar coordinate representations. For example, the polar
coordinates (3, 5
), (3, 7
), (3, 13
), and (3, 19
) all refer to the same point as
3
3
3
3
that of (3, 3 ).
The polar coordinates (r, + 2k), where k Z, represent the same
point as that of (r, ).
In polar coordinate system, it is possible for the coordinates (r, ) to have
a negative value of r. In this case, the point is |r| units from the pole in the
opposite direction of the terminal side of , as shown in Figure 3.36.
260
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Figure 3.36
C
O
), B(4, 11
),
Example 3.9.2. Plot the following points in one polar plane: A(3, 4
3
6
C(2, ), and D(3.5, 7
).
4
EP
E
Solution. As described above, a polar point with negative radial coordinate lies
on the opposite ray of the terminal side of .
261
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.9.1
A(2, 2 )
B(3, 7
)
4
G(3, 2
)
3
H(4, 12
)
F (1, 41
)
12
I(2, 11
)
2
EP
E
Answer:
E(4, 4 )
C(4, 6 )
C
O
D(2, 4
)
3
PY
2. Give the polar coordinates (r, ) with indicated properties that represent the
same point as the given polar coordinates.
262
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Answer: (2, )
Answer: (5, 7
)
4
2
Answer: (5, 3 )
Answer: (1, )
Answer: (2, sin1 (0.6) )
Answer: (3, cos1 (0.4) + )
PY
We now have two ways to describe points on a plane whether to use the Cartesian coordinates (x, y) or the polar coordinates (r, ). We now derive the conversion from one of these coordinate systems to the other.
EP
E
C
O
Figure 3.37
and
y = r sin .
x = r cos
(r, )
(x, y)
y = r sin
Example 3.9.3. Convert the polar coordinates (5, ) and (3, 6 ) to Cartesian
coordinates.
Solution.
x = 3 cos = 3 3
6
2
(3, 6 )
y = 3 sin = 3
2
( 3 2 3 , 32 )
PY
(5, 0)
As explained on page 260 (right after Example 3.9.1), we expect that there
are infinitely many polar coordinate representations that correspond to just one
given rectangular coordinate representation. Although we can actually determine
all of them, we only need to know one of them and we can choose r 0.
C
O
Teaching Notes
One can also easily
convert the polar
coordinates (5, )
to its
corresponding
rectangular
coordinates (5, 0)
by simply plotting
the point.
x = 5 cos = 5
(5, )
y = 5 sin = 0
Suppose a point P is represented by the rectangular coordinates (x, y). Referring back to Figure 3.37, the equation of the circle is
p
x2 + y 2 = r 2
=
r = x2 + y 2 .
EP
E
3
2
(or their
Now, suppose x 6= 0. From the boxed definition again on page 139, we know
that
y
tan = ,
x
where is an angle in standard position whose terminal side passes through the
point (x, y).
Conversion from Rectangular to Polar Coordinates
(x, y) = (0, 0) (r, ) = (0, ), R
(y, )
if y > 0
2
(0, y) (r, ) =
(|y|, 3 ) if y < 0
y6=0
2
(x, 0) if x > 0
(x, 0) (r, ) =
(|x|, ) if x < 0
x6=0
264
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(x, y)
x6=0, y6=0
(r, )
r=
x2 + y 2
tan =
y
x
PY
(3) (3, 3)
C
O
(2) (4, 4)
(6) (12, 8)
tan =
y
x
r = x2 + y 2 = 42 + 42 = 4 2
4
4
= 1 =
4 2, 4
EP
E
(4, 4)
r = (3)2 + ( 3)2 = 2 3
7
6
tan = 33 = 33 = =
(3, 3) 2 3, 7
6
Teaching Notes
Plotting the points
on the
superimposed
Cartesian and
polar planes is a
quicker approach
in converting
rectangular
coordinates to
polar.
r = 62 + (2)2 = 2 10
2
6
= 13 = = tan1 13
(6, 2) 2 10, tan1 13
tan =
r = (3)2 + 62 = 3 5
6
3
= 2 = = + tan1 (2)
(3, 6) 3 5, + tan1 (2)
tan =
Teaching Notes
Recall that
tan1 (2) is in
QIV.
265
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes
We may also use
= tan1 23 .
r = (12)2 + (8)2 = 4 13
tan =
8
12
2
3
(12, 8)
= = + tan1
4 13, + tan1 23
2
3
Seatwork/Homework 3.9.2
(d)
(e)
(f) (3, 2
)
3
PY
(c)
Answer: (0, 6)
Answer: (2, 3)
Answer: (2 3, 2)
C
O
(b)
Answer: (2, 0)
Answer: (2 2, 2 2)
)
(4, 3
4
)
(6, 3
2
(2, 2
)
3
(4, 7
)
6
Answer: ( 32 , 3 2 3 )
Answer: ( 2 3 2 , 31 )
Answer: ( 65 , 58 )
(a) (0, 6)
EP
E
(b) (3, 3)
(c) (3 3, 3)
(d) (1, 3)
Answer: (3 2, 4 )
Answer: (6, 5
)
6
Answer: (2, 4
)
3
Answer: ( 2, 3
)
4
(e) (1, 4)
(f) (2, 4)
(g) (6, 2)
(h) (1, 1)
PY
Example 3.9.5. Identify the polar graph of r = 2, and sketch its graph in the
polar plane.
EP
E
C
O
C
O
PY
graph of = 5
is a line passing through the pole and with angle 5
with
4
4
respect to the polar axis, as shown below.
Example 3.9.7. Identify (and describe) the graph of the equation r = 4 sin .
Solution.
EP
E
r
r2
x2 + y 2
x2 + y 2 4y
x2 + (y 2)2
= 4 sin
= 4r sin
= 4y
=0
=4
Therefore, the graph of r = 4 sin is a circle of radius 2 and with center at (2, 2 ).
268
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7
6
0.59 0.27
5
4
4
3
3
2
3
4
5
6
0.27 0.59
5
3
7
4
11
6
3.73 3.41
EP
E
C
O
3.41 3.73
2
3
PY
Solution. (1)
r
r2
x2 + y 2
x2 + 4x + y 2
(x + 2)2 + y 2
= 4 cos
= 4r cos
= 4x
=0
=4
269
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
2
3
4 3.46
2.83
3
4
5
6
2.83 3.46
EP
E
From the table, the microphone is most sensitive to sounds coming from
angles = 0 and = , and least sensitive to sound coming from an angle
2
= 2 .
Seatwork/Homework 3.9.3
2
3
(b) r = 3
Answer: Circle with center at the pole and of radius 3
(c) r = 2 sin
Answer: Circle of radius 1 and with center at (1, 2 )
270
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d) r = 3 cos
Answer: Circle of radius 1.5 and with center at (1.5, 0)
(e) r = 2 + 2 cos
Answer: A cardioid
EP
E
C
O
PY
(a) r = 3
(b) r = 2 sin
271
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
(d) r = 4 cos
C
O
PY
(c) r = 2 + 2 sin
where |r| gives the sensitivity of the microphone of a sound coming from an
angle (in radians).
C
O
PY
Exercises 3.9
(b) Sound coming from what angle [0, 2) is the microphone most sensitive to? Least sensitive?
Answer: Most sensitive at = 0; least sensitive at =
EP
E
D(3, 2
)
3
)
G(4, 8
3
B(1, 7
)
3
E(4, 4 )
H(2, 11
)
12
C(2, 4 )
F (3, 7
)
12
I(1, 15
)
2
Answer:
273
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Give the polar coordinates (r, ) with indicated properties that represent the
same point as the given polar coordinates.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Answer: (3, )
Answer: (10, 5
)
3
Answer: (4, 2 )
Answer: (1, )
Answer: (2, + cos1 32 )
PY
(c) (2, 2
)
3
(d) (5, 3)
(e) (8, 11
)
6
Answer: (4, 0)
Answer: (2 2, 2 2)
Answer: (1, 3)
Answer: (5, 0)
Answer: (4 3, 4)
C
O
(a) (4, )
)
(b) (4, 7
4
(a) (0, 6)
(b) (5, 5)
EP
E
(c) (2, 6)
(d) (1, 4)
(e) (1, 3)
Answer: (6, 3
)
2
5
Answer: (5 2, 4 )
(a) = 3
Answer: A line passing through the pole and with angle 3 with respect
to the polar axis
274
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C
O
PY
(b) r = 3 sin
Answer: A circle tangent to the x-axis with center at (0, 1.5)
EP
E
(c) r = cos
Answer: A circle tangent to the y-axis with center at (0.5, 0)
(d) r = 2 2 cos
Answer: A cardioid
275
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(e) r = 1 + sin
Answer: A cardioid
EP
E
Answer:
C
O
6. The graph of the polar equation r = 2 cos 2 is a four-petaled rose. Sketch its
graph.
1.164
1.967
0.59 units.
? 8. Polar equations are also used by scientists and engineers to model motion of
satellites orbiting the Earth. One satellite follows the path
r=
36210
,
6 cos
276
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
where r is the distance in kilometers between the center of the Earth and the
satellite, and is the angular measurement in radians with respect to a fixed
predetermined axis.
(a) At what value of [0, 2) is the satellite closest to Earth, and what is
the closest distance?
Answer: The satellite is closest to Earth when cos = 1, and this occurs
36210
5182.86
when = . The closest distance is, therefore, r = 6(1)
kilometers.
PY
(b) How far away from Earth can the satellite reach?
Answer: The satellite can reach as far as r = 36210
7242 km away from
61
the Earth.
9. The graph of the polar equation
15
3 2 cos
is a conic section. Identify and find its equation in rectangular coordinate
system.
Answer: Ellipse, 5x2 + 9y 2 60x 225 = 0
C
O
r=
Solution
EP
E
3r 2r cos = 15
p
x
3 x2 + y 2 2r = 15
r
p
2
3 x2 + y 2 = (2x + 15)2
6
3 + 3 sin
is a parabola. Find its equation in rectangular coordinate system.
r=
Answer: y = 14 x2 + 1
11. For what values of [0, 2) will the graphs of r = 4 cos and r cos = 1
intersect?
Answer: 3 , 2
, 4
, 5
3
3
3
2 sin 2
sin3
cos3
Answer: x3 = y 3 + 4xy
277
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
C
O
Answers to
All Exercises
in Supplementary Problems
and
EP
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3
3. center 4,
,r=1
4
EP
E
1
2
279
5
3
5 7
7
,
,r=
2 2
4
PY
1 4
, , r = 2
3 3
C
O
9. center
8. center
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
y 2x + 8 = 0.
Finally, the radius of the circle can be obtained by computing the distance
between the center and any of the points A, B, or C. The radius is 5; therefore,
the circles equation is (x 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = 25
The center of the circle is on both perpendicular bisectors; that is, the center is
the intersection of these two lines. By solving the system involving y 2x+8 =
0 and y 7x + 23 = 0, we see that the center is (3, 2).
2y + 3x + 5 = 0.
280
3
y 2 = (x + 3)
2
28. We set up a coordinate system by making the circles center the origin. Since
the circle has radius 11/2 = 5.5, its equation is x2 + y 2 = 5.52 .
27. Set up a Cartesian coordinate system by assigning C as the origin. Then the
circle on the left end has radius 100 and has equation x2 + y 2 = 10000. A
radius of the circle on the right end can be drawn from C to the upper right
corner
of the figure;
this radius has length (by the Pythagorean theorem)
3002 + 1002 = 100000. Then the circle on the right end has equation x2 +
y 2 = 100000. We want the
at y = 50. In this case, the
PY
x2 + 4 = 5.52 x = 26.25
C
O
Similarly, the slope of BC is 1/7 and its midpoint is (3.5, 1.5). Then the
perpendicular bisector to BC has equation
7
3
y 7x + 23 = 0.
y =7 x
2
2
y 2 = 2(x 5)
22. Let A(3, 3), B(7, 1), and C(0, 2). The slope of AB is 1/2 and its midpoint
is (5, 2). Then the perpendicular bisector to AB has equation
EP
E
10. x2 + y 2 = 75
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
3
, 1 , directrix x = , axis y = 1
2
2
EP
E
3
11
, directrix y = , axis x = 3
2
2
PY
C
O
281
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
15. 4.17 cm
25
2.08 ft
12
EP
E
14.
12. x2 = 8(y 7)
1.
(0, 0)
covertices:
vertices: V1 (2 2, 0), V2 (2 2, 0)
foci:
center:
282
Since the rectangular object is 25 m wide, it will span the interval from x =
3
3.
2.
4.
(0, 2)
F1 (1
(1, 1)
3, 1), F2 (1 +
3, 1)
covertices:
foci:
center:
(5, 2)
PY
covertices:
foci:
center:
covertices:
foci:
center:
C
O
18. Set up a coordinate system by assigning the midpoint of the archs base as
the origin. Then the parabolic arch has vertex at (0, 24), opens downward,
and passes through the point (16, 24). Its equation is of the form x2 =
4c(y 24). By substituting x = 16 and y = 0, we get c = 8/3 and the
(y 24).
equation is x2 = 32
3
17. 3.75 cm
16. Note that the lowest point of the rope is the vertex of the parabola. This
occurs midway between the two posts. Set up a coordinate system by making
the vertex (0, 0). Then the parabola has equation of the form x2 = 4cy and
passes through the points (4.5, 8) and (4.5, 8). Substituting either of these
points to the equation tells us that c = 4.52 /32. Therefore, the equation of
4.52
the parabola is x2 =
y.
8
The x coordinates of the points 2 m from the posts are 2.5 and 2.5. Substitut200
ing either of these values to the equation tells us that the height is
2.47
81
m
11. (y 9) = 80(x 4)
9. (x + 10)2 = 34(y 3)
8. (x + 10)2 = 16(y + 5)
7. (y 11)2 = 36(x 7)
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(7, 5)
(x 2)2 (y 8)2
+
=1
49
16
covertices:
8.
(x + 3)2 (y + 7)2
+
=1
36
100
EP
E
(4, 5)
foci:
center:
covertices:
foci:
center:
16. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
a = 50, b = 30, and c = 40. Since the radiation source and the target area will
be located at the foci, they should be placed at the coordinates (40, 0) and
(40, 0). These positions are 10 cm away from an end of the reflector.
15. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
a = 60 and b = 20. We want the length of the segment with endpoints (on the
2
y2
+ 20
ellipse) having x = 45 (or 45). The y coordinates are given by 45
2 = 1,
602
q
2
45
2
or y = 20 1 602 13.23. Hence, the desired width is 26.46 ft.
14. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at theorigin. Then
c = 50 and a = 56. It follows that the height at the center is b = 562 502
25.22 m.
283
12. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
y2
x2
the equation is of the form 20
2 + b2 = 1. The point (18, 2) is on the ellipse so
182
22
we have 202 + b2 = 1. The height at the center is b 4.59 ft.
11. Since the major axis is vertical, the center has the same x coordinate as the
focus and the same y coordinate as the covertex; that is, the center is (9, 10).
(x + 9)2
Then c = 5, b = 10, and a2 = 125. Therefore, the equation is
+
100
2
(y 10)
= 1.
125
10. The center is at (12, 18) or (3, 7). Since the major axis should be longer
than the minor axis, the center should be at (3, 7) with a = 11 and b = 9.
(x + 3)2 (y + 7)2
Moreover, the ellipse is vertical. Hence, the equation is
+
= 1.
81
121
y2
(x + 211)2
+
= 1.
14 776 336 14 731 815
13. Recall that the unit is 100 km. The vertices of the ellipse are at (3633, 0) and
(4055, 0). Then the center of the ellipse is at (211, 0). Then a = 3844 and
c = 211. It follows that b2 = 14731815. The equation is
2.
1.
(0, 0)
asymptotes: y = x
foci:
center:
PY
foci:
center: (0, 0)
C
O
7.
6.
5.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(8, 6)
EP
E
foci:
center:
4.
(0, 5)
center:
3.
284
F2 (3, 3 +
F1 (3, 3
(3, 3)
15),
15)
(2, 4)
(x 6)2 (y + 2)2
=1
9
72
8.
9.
(x + 10)2 (y + 4)2
=1
81
256
(x 11)2 (y 9)2
= 1.
36
64
10. The intersection (11, 9) of the two asymptotes is the center of the hyperbola.
Then the hyperbola is horizontal and a = 6. Since the slopes of the asymptotes
are 34 , we have ab = 43 and b = 8. Therefore, the equation is
y2
(x + 7)2
=1
144
145
7.
PY
foci:
center:
6),
V2 (3, 3 + 6)
6
asymptotes: y + 3 =
(x + 3)
3
vertices: V1 (3, 3
foci:
center:
C
O
6.
5.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
b
y k = (x h).
a
285
14. Situate the two stations on the Cartesian plane so that A(75, 0) and B (75, 0).
Let P represent the plane and let its coordinates be (h, 60). Since the signal
from B arrives earlier than the signal from b, it should follow that h > 0.
Moreover, P should lie on the the right branch of the hyperbola whose equation
x2
y2
is given by 2 2 = 1, where 2a = P A P B = 0.2 (480) = 96 a = 48,
b
a
and b = 752 482 = 9 41.
s
602
h2
602
2 = h =
1+
482 69.29
2
48
3321
9 41
8. circle
7. empty set
6. hyperbola
5. parabola
If the focus of the parabola is (1, 0), then its vertex is (1, 0.5) and its
equation is (x + 1)2 = 2(y 0.5). Similarly, if the focus of the parabola is
(3, 0), then its vertex is (3, 0.5) and its equation is (x 3)2 = 2(y 0.5).
(x 1)2
y 2 = 1; its foci are (1, 0)
3
and (3, 0) and the top side of its auxiliary rectangle is on the line y = 1.
(y 2)2
(x 5)2
+
= 1; so its foci
36
100
are (5, 10) and (5, 6) while its vertices are (5, 12) and (5, 8). The equations
of the circles are (x 5)2 + (y 10)2 = 4, (x 5)2 + (y 10)2 = 324,
(x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 4, and (x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 324.
4. point
3. parabola
2. ellipse
(a) is a circle if
Its graph
r+2
.
r1
r+2
> 0; that is, when r (, 2) (1, +).
r1
(x + 7)2 + (y 3)2 =
PY
x2 (y 5)2
+
= 1; so its center is (0, 5)
17
9
If the parabolas directix is x = 17, then its vertex is 217 , 5 and its
equation is (y 5)2 = 2 17 x + 217 . Similarly, if the parabolas direc
17
tix is x = 17, then its vertex is
, 5 and its equation is (y 5)2 =
2
2 17 x 217 .
(y + 5)2 (x + 9)2
= 1. Its auxil25
25
iary rectangle has corners (14, 0), (4, 0), (4, 10), (14, 10). The equation of the circle is (x + 9)2 + (y + 5)2 = 50.
C
O
13. The midpoint (9, 1) of the two given corners is the center of the hyperbola.
Since the transverse axis is horizontal, a = 7 and b = 2. Therefore, the
equation is
(x 9)2 (y 1)2
= 1.
49
4
(y 4)2 x2
= 1.
16
9
12. Note that (3, 8) is not on the given asymptote. Then two other corners of the
auxiliary rectangle are on the given asymptote; one has x coordinate 3 and one
has y coordinate 8. These points are (3, 8) and (3, 0). Their midpoint (0, 4)
is the center of the hyperbola; then a = 4 and b = 3. Hence, the equation is
a
5
(y 8)2 (x + 4)2
=
= a = 5 and b = 12 =
= 1.
2
12
25
144
169 a
11. The intersection (4, 8) of the two asymptotes is the center of the hyperbola.
Then the hyperbola is vertical and c = 13. Since the slopes of the asymptotes
5
5
, we have ab = 12
.
are 12
(y k)2 (x h)2
a
= 0 y k = (x h).
a2
b2
b
Hence, the slopes of the asymptotes are a/b. This is used in the following
item.
EP
E
(x h)2 (y k)2
=0
a2
b2
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
(x 4)2
y2
+
= 1. Its graph is
m+7
2m
(b)
4
9
4 89
,
, ,
3 20
3 20
1. (a) (1, 6)
(e) the empty set if m + 7 < 0 and 2m < 0; that is, when m < 7.
(b) a horizontal ellipse if m + 7 > 2m > 0; that is, when 0 < m < 7.
r+2
= 0; that is, when r = 2.
r1
r+2
(c) is the empty set if
< 0; that is, when r (2, 1).
r1
(b) is a point if
286
PY
(e) No solution
3
1,
, 1 15, 1 , 1 + 15, 1
2
C
O
(d)
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
x2 + (y 6)2 = 36
x2 = 4ky,
287
If k > 0, the system might have one or two solutions. To ensure that the
solution is unique, we set the discriminant to be nonpositive: 4k 12 0
k 3.
where the first equation is a circle above the x-axis, tangent to the x-axis at
x = 0, and the second equation is a parabola facing upward or downward
depending on k.
PY
(0, 0)
y2
x2
+
= 1. This is a vertical ellipse.
7
25
covertices: W1 ( 7, 0), W2 ( 7, 0)
foci:
center:
(x 8)2 y 2
+
= 0.
2
7
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have the same sign and are unequal,
the graph is an ellipse, a point, or the empty set. Completing the squares,
we see that the equation is equivalent to
(x 7)2 (y + 3)2
= 1.
4
3
(c) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are of opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we see
that the equation is equivalent to
Hence, the graph is a circle with center (0.5, 1.5) and radius 2.
1. (a) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are equal, the graph is a circle, a point,
or the empty set. Completing the squares, we see that the equation is
equivalent to
2
2
1
3
x
+ y+
= 4.
2
2
C
O
giving x = 4 or x = 5. Thus, the solutions are (4, 5), (4, 5), (5, 4), and
(5, 4).
3. Let (x, y) be the ordered pair that satisfies the conditions. The resulting
system of equations is
x2 = 2y 2 +
8
x2 + y 2 = 5
16
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
,
, , and , .
Solving yields
, ,
,
2 4
2 4
2 4
2 4
has a solution. Equating the first and second equation to each other yields
t 16.2 seconds (note that t > 0).
2. Note that this is equivalent to solving for t such that the system
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
1)
11
2
+ 1, 52 .
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 4(x2 6y + 9)
288
5. Set up a coordinate system by making the center of the doors base the origin.
Then the ellipse has center (0, 2) with a = 1/2 and b = 0.3; then its is equation
2
x2
+ (y2)
= 1.
0.52
0.32
(3, 0),
4. Multiplying the first equation by 2, we get 2(x 1)2 + 2(y + 1)2 = 10. By
subtracting the second equation from this new equation, we get the equation
2(y + 1)2 + 8 = 10 y. This has solutions y = 0 and y = 5/2.
= 1.
4
12
Therefore, the point traces a horizontal hyperbola with center at (4, 1).
F1 (8 2, 0),
F2 (8 2, 0)
(0, 0)
x2 y 2
asymptotes: y = x
foci:
center:
(y 4)2 (x 6)2
= 0.
11
17
Hence, the graph is a pair of intersecting lines given by the equations
y 4 = 11
(x 6).
17
PY
(x + 2)2 (y 1)2
+
= 1.
4
9
Hence, the graph is a vertical ellipse with center (2, 1).
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are of opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we see
that the equation is equivalent to
C
O
(b) The intersection (2, 5) of the two asymptotes is the center of the
hyperbola. Then the hyperbola is horizontal and a = 5. Using the slopes
. It follows that b = 12 and the
of the asymptotes, we have ab = 12
4
(x + 2)2 (y + 5)2
equation is
= 1.
25
144
3. (a) The parabola opens to the right and has focal distance c = 6. Its equation
is (y 3)2 = 24(x + 1).
asymptotes: y + 4 =
43 (x
(y + 4)2 (x 1)2
= 1. This is a vertical
64
36
foci:
center: C(1, 4)
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
289
5. Set up a coordinate system so that the opening of the hose (the parabolas
vertex) is at (0, 3) and that the water flows towards the positive x-axis. Then
the x-axis (y = 0) corresponds to the ground; it follows the parabola passes
through the point (2, 0). Hence, the equation of the parabola is x2 = 43 (y3).
4. Completing the squares, we see that the first equation is equivalent to 9(x +
3)2 = 4y 2 + 36. On the other hand, the second equation is equivalent to
9(x + 3)2 = 36y + 36. Subtracting the second equation from the first, we get
4y 2 36y = 0, which has solutions y = 0 and y = 9.
(x + 5)2 (y 3)2
+
= 1.
16
81
(b) Since the ellipse has vertical or horizontal major axis, the center is at
either (1, 12) or (5, 3). Since the major axis is longer than the minor
axis, the center must be at (5, 3). Then the ellipse is vertical with a = 9
and b = 4. Its equation is
3. (a) The parabola opens downward and has focal distance c = 5. Its equation
is (x 7)2 = 20(y + 7).
covertices:
F1 (3 3 5, 2), F2 (3 + 3 5, 2)
foci:
center: C(3, 2)
PY
n (2(17) + (n 1)3)
= 30705 3n2 + 31n 61410 = 0
2
Using the quadratic formula and noting that n must be a whole number, we
have n = 138.
sn =
5016 = a3 + a6 + + a99
4. 15000 = a1 + a2 + a3 + + a100 =
3.
2. a4 = a1 r41 =
2
8
a6
4
2
; a6 = a1 r61 =
r = . We then
= r2 =
9
81
a
9
3
4
3
3
2
2
compute for a1 by taking a4 = a1
= a1 = .
3
9
4
Therefore, the point traces a vertical ellipse with center at (2, 4).
4
(x 2)2 + y 2 = (y 2 10y + 25)
9
9(x 2)2 + 5(y 2 + 8y) = 100
9(x 2)2 + 5(y + 4)2 = 100 + 80
(x 2)2 (y + 4)2
+
= 1.
20
36
p
2
(x 2)2 + y 2 = |y 5|.
3
If Nikko stands on a 1.5-ft stool and the vertex remains at (0, 3), the line
y = 1.5 will correspond to the ground.
will strike the
q Hence, the water
C
O
(x + 3)2 (y 2)2
+
= 1. This is a horizontal
49
4
EP
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
2a + 99d = 300
1
a + 50d = 152,
s4 =
290
4 (2a1 + (4 1)d)
= 80 2a1 + 3d = 40.
2
Since the sum of the first two numbers are one-third of the sum of the last two
1
numbers, we have (a1 + a2 ) = a3 + a4 4a1 + 14d = 0. Combining yields
3
d = 10, and thus a1 = 5, a2 = 15, a3 = 25, a4 = 35.
9. We have
yielding a2 = 1 or a2 = 2, respectively.
a3
a7
2 + 2d
2 + 6d
=
=
2d2 + 6d = 0 d = 3 or 0,
a2
a3
2+d
2 + 2d
(c)
(b)
1. (a)
i=3
i=1
i=2
5
X
x2 x4 x6 x8 x10
+
+
+
+
2
4
8
16
32
(1)i xi1 = x x2 + x3 x4
2i
3 3
10
i
=
+ ... +
= 26 3
2
2
2
2
5
X
x2i
10
X
i=3
i(i 5) =
i=1
i=1
150
X
2=4
150(151)
+ 2(150) = 45, 600
2
a3n
(1)i+1 (x + 7 2i)i
i+
PY
i=1
150
X
120
X
(4i + 2) = 4
120
X
i=1
150
X
i=1
27
X
i=1
i=1
i=1
i2
i=1
130
X
9
130(131)[2(130) + 1]
+ 9(130) = 741 975
6
=4
i=1
130
X
120(121)(2(120) + 1)
=
+ 10 = 583 230
6
130
130
X
X
(c)
(2i 3)(2i + 3) =
(4i2 9)
(b)
3. (a)
10
1
22 32
102 X n2
+ 3 + 3 + ... + 3 =
3
3
4
5
11
(n + 2)3
i=1
(c) a3 + a6 + a9 + . . . + a81 =
(b)
4
X
11. Note that this is a geometric series with common ratio 2n 1. Thus, the sum
will have a finite value if |2n 1| < 1 1 < 2n 1 < 1 0 < n < 1.
Thus, n (0, 1).
C
O
0.123
41
=
.
0.123 =
1 0.001
333
7. Note that
c1
9/5
1/5
25
b1
= .
s=
1 rb 1 rc
1 3/5 1 2/5
6
where bn and cn are both geometric series with |r| < 1. Thus, the infinite sum
s is given by
= bn cn ,
5n
5 5
5 2
a1
a1 (1 r3 )
5. We have s = 108 =
and s3 = 112 =
= 108 (1 r3 )
1r
1r
1
r = a1 = 144.
27
we get a = 48 and d = 4.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
i=1
(i 1) i
=
i=1
EP
E
i=1
1
X
(i + 1) = (1 + 1) =
Assume:
Part 2.
i=1
k
X
(i + 1) =
k(k + 3)
.
2
2. Part 1.
1(1 + 3)
2
k+2 k+3
= 2 k + k+1
2
2
k+3
= 2 k+1 .
2
k+1
k
X
X
i
k+1
i
=
+ k+1
i
i
2
2
2
i=1
i=1
k+1
X
i
k+3
To show:
= 2 k+1 .
i
2
2
i=1
k
X
i
k+2
Assume:
=2 k .
i
2
2
i=1
Part 2.
1
1+2
=2 1
2
2
1. Part 1.
291
i=1
k+1
X
i=1
k+1
X
k+1
X
i(i!) =
i=1
i=1
k
X
To show:
Assume:
Part 2.
i=1
2(1) 1 = 12
(2i 1) = (k + 1)2 .
(2i 1) = k 2 .
k
X
i=1
k
X
PY
i=1
i(i!) = (k + 2)! 1.
i(i!) = (k + 1)! 1.
k+1
X
i=1
k
X
1(1!) = (1 + 1)! 1
4. Part 1.
To show:
Assume:
Part 2.
(i + 1) + [(k + 2)]
k(k + 3)
(k + 2)
2
2
k + 5k + 4
=
2
(k + 1)(k + 4)
=
.
2
i=1
k
X
(k + 1)(k + 4)
.
2
(i + 1) =
(i + 1) =
3. Part 1.
To show:
C
O
1
= (30 + 3 20) = 35 2
2
a1 + a2
s
a1 a2 X ai
+
=
6=
= .
b1
b2
b
b
+
b
t
i
1
2
i=1
i=1
200 s
i=
2
f (i)
200
X
i=1
50
X
(1 2i)
g(i) + 3
D
200
X
i=1
50
X
5. s =
200
X
50
X
g(i) + 3f (i)
1
=
2
2
i=1
4. We have
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
1
1
= =
2
2
2(1)
(1)1 12 =
i 2
(1)i i2 =
k+1
X
i=1
k
X
(1)k k(k + 1)
.
2
(1)1 1(1 + 1)
2
i=1
k+1
X
i=1
k
X
(1)k k(k + 1)
=
+ (1)k+1 (k + 1)2
2
(1)i i2 =
(1)k+1 (k + 1)(k + 2)
To show:
(1) i =
.
2
i=1
Assume:
Part 2.
6. Part 1.
1
1
1
1
1
=P 1
2
k+1
k+1
k
1
=
2k k + 1
1
=
.
2(k + 1)
1
1
1
1
1
Assume: P = 1
.
1
1
1
=
2
3
k1
k
2k
1
1
1
1
To show: 1
.
1
1
=
2
k
k+1
2(k + 1)
Part 2.
(2i 1) + 2(k + 1) 1
EP
E
D
i=1
2
k
X
= k + 2k + 1
= (k + 1)2 .
(2i 1) =
5. Part 1.
i=1
k+1
X
8. Part 1.
43(k+1)+1 +23(k+1)+1 +1 = 6443k+1 +823k+1 +1 = 5643k+1 +8 43k+1 + 23k+1 + 1
7
Part 2.
PY
111 6 = 5
11k+1 6 = 11 11k 11 6 + 11 6 6 = 11 11k 6 + 60
Part 2.
10. Part 1.
Part 2.
9. Part 1.
Part 2.
C
O
292
7. Part 1.
(1)k (k + 1)
(k 2(k + 1))
2
(1)k+1 (k + 1)(k + 2)
.
=
2
=
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
52 = 25 < 25 = 32
Assume:
Part 2
1
=1
1
k
X
1
1
2
3
i
k
i=1
13. Part 1. 1 2
Assume: 2k + 1 < 2k
Part 2
k+1
X
1
1
2
i3
k+1
i=1
Part 2
293
< ak+1
< 2ak+1
p
< 2ak+1
< ak+2 .
PY
(c) (1 + x) = 4x3/2 + x2 + 6x + 4 x + 1
9 5 3 9 6
2. (a) 24
x,2
x
5
6
8
1 10 p
(b) 6
2 2 q2
21 2 80 84
(c)
xy ,y
20
20 5/3
(d)
x
10
15 8k45 605k
(e) (k + 1)st term, 2153k
x
y
, so set 60 5k = 0 k = 12 and
k
15 51
get 221
x
12
13 4k26
(f) (k + 1)st term, (1)k 2k13
x
, so set 4k 26 = 2 k = 7 and
k
13 2
get 26
x
7
ak
2ak
2ak
ak+1
k+1
X
1
1
1
(k + 1)3 k
2 +
= 2
. Note that 0 < (k + 1)2
3
3
i
k
(k + 1)
(k + 1)3
i=1
(k + 1)3 k
(k + 1)2
1
.
(k + 1)2 < (k + 1)3 k, thus 2
<2
=2
3
(k + 1)
(k + 1)3
k+1
Prove:
C
O
To finish the proof, we must use induction again to prove that 2k + 1 < 2k for
k 5.
Assume: k 2 < 2k
Part 2
12. Part 1.
Assume:
10k 5
+ + 4k+2 is divisible by 3.
3
3
10k+1 5
Prove:
+ + 4k+3 is divisible by 3.
3
3
k
5
10k+1 5 k+3
10k 5
10
5
+ +4
= 10
+ +44k+2 = 10
+ + 4k+2 64n+2 9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Part 2.
101 5
+ + 41+2 = 1029 = 3(343)
3
3
The number is divisible by 3 for n = 1.
11. Part 1.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
19
X
19
(3)k = (1 3)19 = (2)19 .
k
k=0
(b) O
Thus,
i=1
i=1
i2 + 3i + 2
50
X
2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6
i2 + 3i + 2
50
X
2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6
i=1
(2i + 3) = 2700.
294
(b) O
i=1
30
X
i=1
50
X
30
i=1
50
X
PY
(2i + 1)(i 3) =
1 + 4 + 7 + + (3(k + 1) 2)
k(3k 1)
3k 2 + 5k + 2
(k + 1)(3k + 2)
=
+ (3k + 1) =
=
2
2
2
5. (a) For n = k + 1:
k
8
1
8 244k
8
8k
4.
(x3 )
=
x
= 24 4k = 0 = k = 6 =
= 28
k
x
k
6
(b)
3. (a)
1. (a) G, r = 4/5
1
1
1
+
+ +
13 35
(2(k + 1) 1)(2(k + 1) + 1)
k
1
2k 2 + 3k + 1
k+1
=
+
=
=
2k + 1 (2k + 1)(2k + 3)
(2k + 1) (2k + 3)
2k + 3
5. For n = k + 1:
k
1
8 162k
x
= 16 2k = 8 = k = 4
k
2
4
1
8 8
35
=
x
= x8
4
2
8
28
28 19 27 19
2819
(b) k = 19 =
(n3 )
(3m)19 =
3 n m
19
19
4. (a)
C
O
a2 + 2
a3 + 1
=
. Thus, a1 = 5,
a2 + 2
a1 + 4
(c) O
50
X
1. (a) G, r = 3/2
3. We have
4 34!
3 34!
=
k = 14.
k!(34 k)!
(k + 1)!(34 (k + 1))!
Simplifying yields
34k k
34
34
3
= 434(k+1) 3k+1
k
k+1
EP
E
6
6 k
x , so set k = 3 and get (2)3
3
k
704k
k 30k 30
y
, so set 70 4k = 2 k = 18
(h) (k + 1)st term, (1) 2
k
30
and get 212
18
1
8 4 k
1
7
x 2 , so set 4 k = k = 1 and get
(i) (k + 1)st term, (3)k
k
2
2
8
3
1
1
6 3 k
1
3
6
(j) (k + 1)st term, 2k
x 2 , so set 3 k = k = 3 and get 23
k
2
2
3
4
X 10
3. Approximating yields (2.1)10
210k (0.1)k = 1667.904, which has
k
k=0
an approximate error of 0.08.
34
X
34 34k
434k 3k
4. Given (4x + 3)34 =
x
, we get k such that
k
k=0
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2
9 7
189
=
cm2
2
6
16
s
6
= = 1 rad; 1 rad = 1
r
6
180
8
cm
3
1
1
14. 2r = r = = 2; A = r2 = r2 (2) = r2
2
2
13.
180
= 54
57.30
3
2
3
3
12. r = cm; s = cm; = 5 =
rad;
rad =
2
3
5
10
10
10
3
10. =
5
, A = 32 in2
4
v
u 2(32)
16
16 5
u
r = u = =
in
5
t 5
5
4
8. = 108 =
3
1
3
135
; r = 15 cm; A = (15)2
=
cm2
5
2
5
2
s
5
2(15)
6
6
2
; A = 15 in ; r =
= =
in
9. = 150 =
5
6
7
9
1
; r = cm; A =
6
2
2
EP
E
107
9(2) = rad
6
6
7. =
6.
6
6
rev = rev
5
5
360
= 432
1 rev
11
11
2
22
2.
rev =
rev
=
rad
5
5
1 rev
5
6
6
24
3. 216 = 216
=
rad; s = 4
=
cm
180
5
5
5
11
6 11
33
4. 99 = 99
=
rad; s =
=
cm
180
20
20
10
1.
1 2
(6)
2
3
10
54
cm2
5
1
1 2
(6)2 (3)(6 3) = (12 9 3) cm2
19. Asegment = Asector Atriangle =
2 3
2
18. The total length of the path that the point traces is the sum of the sides of
the equilateral triangle and the three arcs.
4. The tangent function is positive in QI and QIII. Cosine is negative in QII and
QIII. Therefore, the angle is in QIII.
!
5
5
3 1
5.
is in QII. The reference angle is , and therefore P
=
,
.
6
6
6
2 2
17
17
7
17
is coterminal with
+ 4 =
, and
terminates in QIII.
6
6
6
6
33
33
33
is coterminal with
8 = , and
terminates in QI.
4
4
4
4
2.
1.
PY
20. Angle A measures 60 , thus triangle AOC is equilateral. Central angle BOC
measures 120 . The area of the shaded region is the sum of the areas of triangle
AOC and sector BOC.
4 2 1 2
Area =
(6) +
(6)2 = (9 3 + 12) cm2
3
2 3
C
O
295
3
10
17. r = 6 cm; = 54 =
u 2(800)
120
120
120 40
cm; s =
=
cm
r=u
t = =
9
3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
34
sec =
5
x
15
r
4 15
y
1
cos = =
sec = =
sin = =
r
4
x
15
r
4
r
y
15
x
csc = = 4
tan = =
cot = = 15
y
x
15
y
p
2
2
12. x = 7, y = 1, r = (7) + (1) = 5 2
x
7 2
r
5 2
y
2
cos = =
sec = =
sin = =
r
10
x
7
r
10
r
y
1
x
csc = = 5 2
tan = =
cot = = 7
y
x
7
y
p
2
2
13. x = 2, y = 4 = r = (2) + (4) = 2 5
x
5
r
y
2 5
cos = =
sec = = 5
sin = =
r
5
x
r
5
r
y
x
1
csc = = 52
tan = = 2
cot = =
y
x
y
2
296
3
1
10; cos = , sin =
10
10
and
3
2
< < 2
11
6
2
35
cos
= cos
=
4
4
2
3
4
4
k
|a|
2
= 8
= 2 = k = 8
= 3 = |a| = 6; P =
1
4
b
3
= 4 = b = 23 ; |a| + b =
3.
2.
1. P =
15
2
13
25
109
+ sec
+ sec
+ + sec
= 10 sec
= 10
6
6
6
6
6
Supplementary Problems 3.3 (page 170)
sec
PY
7
2
2
f
=
+
+ 2 2 1 1 = 2
8
2
2
.
6
2 3
20 3
=
3
3
1
3
3 1
+1+
+ +0=2+ 3
= sin 390 + sin 420 + + sin 540 = +
2
2
2
2
3
2
is coterminal with
=
17. cos = sin 2
3
35
4
15. x = 2, y = 6, r =
16.
(3)2 + (1)2 =
1
8
4
9
=
=
10 10
10
5
10
(2)2 + (6)2 = 2 10; sec = 10, csc =
3
10
80
sec2 csc2 = 10
=
9
9
cos2 sin2 =
14. x = 3, y = 1, r =
C
O
!
1 3
,
.
2 2
11
=
3
r
2
2 3
9. csc = 2, cos < 0; r = 2, y = 1, x = 3; sec = = =
x
3
3
p
4
10. cot = 3 , sin < 0 = x = 4, y = 3, r = (4)2 + (3)2 = 5
4
r
5
y
3
x
sec = =
sin = =
cos = =
r
5
x
4
r
5
r
5
y
3
x
4
csc = =
tan = =
cot = =
y
3
x
4
y
3
3
8. tan = , is in QIII
5
3 = 17 4 13
9
2
3
13
sec =
3
2
7. tan = , cos > 0
3
13
sec + tan
3
=
sec tan
13
+
3
11
6.
is in QI. The reference angle is , and therefore P
3
3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
+4
+ 2k, k Z
12. Asymptotes: x =
,
2
domain =
x|x 6=
(d) P = , phase shift = 6 , domain = x|x 6=
(, 1] [3, )
(c) P = 4
, phase
3
shift =
, 23 12 ,
(b) P = , phase shift = 6 , domain = x|x 6=
k
,
2
2k
,
3
12
297
k Z , range =
k Z , range =
(c)
(d)
1
15. y = 8 cos 10
(t 10); at t = 10, y 4.32 (that is, the mass is located about
4.32 cm below the resting position)
14. d = 4 sin t
PY
1
1
sin x
=
=
1
cos x
1 cos x
1 cos x
sin x sin x
sin x
cos
A
sin2 A
sin2 A
4
2
4
sin A + cos A cos A
=
sin2 A
(sin4 A cos4 A) + cos2 A
=
sin2 A
(sin2 A + cos2 A)(sin2 A cos2 A) + cos2 A
=
sin2 A
(sin2 A cos2 A) + cos2 A
sin2 A
=
=
=1
2
sin A
sin2 A
cos2 A
sin A + sin2 A cos2 A
sin A + 1
=
=
=1
1 + sin A
1 + sin A
1 + sin A
1
=
csc x cot x
3. sin A +
2.
sin x
tan x sin x
cos
x sin x = sin x 1 1 = sec x 1
1.
=
sin x
sin x
sin x
cos x sin x
C
O
+ k, k Z , range = R
+ 2k, k Z
2
3
11. Asymptotes: x =
+ 1 + 3 = 2 sin 2 x +
3
2
EP
E
92 3
3
10. y = 2 sin 2 x +
9. y = 3 sec 2(x ) 3
8. range = (, 3] [3, )
7
6
+3=
7. domain = R; range = 43 , 83
6. y = 2 cot 43
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
1
1
cos x + sin x
+
csc x + sec x
x cos x = cos x + sin x
= sin x cos x = sin
cos x sin x
cot x + tan x
cos2 x + sin2 x
+
sin x cos x
sin x cos x
cos
cot
cot
a
=
=
=
sin
csc2
1 + cot2
1 + a2
r
1
1
sin
1 cos2
a2 1
sec2
10. sin cos =
=
=
=
sec
sec
sec
a2
13.
cos a
=
sec a + tan a
cos a
cos a
1 sin a
=
=
= 1 sin a
1
sin a
1 + sin a
1 + sin a
+
cos a cos a
1 + sin a 1 sin a
(1 + sin a)2 (1 sin a)2
12.
=
1 sin a 1 + sin a
(1 sin a)(1 + sin a)
(1 + 2 sin a + sin2 a) (1 2 sin a + sin2 a)
=
(1 sin2 a)
4 sin a
=
2
cos
a
sin a
1
=4
= 4 tan a sec a
cos a
cos a
1
1 + sin a
+1
csc a + 1
1 + sin a
sin
a
=
11.
= sin a =
1
1 sin a
csc a 1
1 sin a
1
sin a
sin a
1
1
8.
=
= cos2 x = 1 sin2 x
1 + tan2 x
sec2 x
7.
sin x cos x
sin2 x cos2 x
tan x cot x
cos
x
sin
x
x sin x = sin2 x cos2 x
=
6.
= cos
sin x cos x
tan x + cot x
sin2 x + cos2 x
+
cos x sin x
cos x sin x
5.
298
PY
tan2 + sec + 1
sec + sec2
=
sin cos
tan + cot
+
cos sin
(sec )(1 + sec )
=
sin2 + cos2
sin cos
= (sec )(1 + sec )(sin cos )
= (sin )(1 + sec ) = sin + tan
cos sin
cos sin
cos2 sin2
=
cos sin = cos2 sin2
sin cos
18.
tan
=
17.
1 tan2
sin
sin
cos
cos
=
sin2
cos2 sin2
1
2
cos2
sin
sin
cos2
=
cos cos2 sin2
sin cos
sin cos
=
=
cos2 (1 cos2 )
2 cos2 1
sin3 cos3
(sin cos )(sin2 + sin cos + cos2 )
=
sin cos
sin cos
= sin2 + cos2 + sin cos = 1 + sin cos
1
1
1 + cos a + 1 cos a
+
=
1 cos a 1 + cos a
(1 cos a)(1 + cos a)
2
2
=
=
= 2 csc2 a
1 cos2 a
sin2 a
C
O
16.
15.
14.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
sin
sin
11
6
+ k B
+ k B
+ k cos B cos
+ k cos B + sin
+ k cos B
+ k sin B
11
6
+ k sin B
+ k sin B
1 tan
45 tan 30
3
1+
3 = 2 + 3
=
3
1
3
3 2
7 2
2
10
= cos =
, sin =
, sin =
, cos =
10
10
10
10
1 + tan 5 tan 5
5
5 5
6
4
4. cot
= cot
=
5
5
12
6
4
tan
tan
4
6
3
1
(1)
= 2 + 3
= 3
3
1
= cot B
sin
cos
4
1
= and in QIV
3
2
sin
+ k B =
3. tan A = tan
2
cos
2. sin = cos
EP
E
2
3
1. cos = sin
=
and in QIV
3
2
2 5
5
11. sin A =
PY
4
3
and A in QII = cos A =
5
5
3
4
cos B = and B in QIV = sin B =
5
5
4
4
3
3
7
(a) sin(A B) =
=
5
5
5
5
25
3
4
4
3
24
(b) cos(A B) =
+
=
5
5
5
5
25
7
7
(c) tan(A B) = 25 =
24
24
25
cos(A B) < 0 and sin(A B) > 0 = A B in QII
3
6
12. csc A = 3 and A in QI = sin A =
, cos A =
3
3
2
2
sec B = 2 and B in QIV = sin B =
, cos B =
2
2
! !
!
!
3
2
6
2
6+2 3
(a) sin(A B) =
=
3
2
3
2
6
9. 3 sin x = 2 = sin x =
2
3
sin(x ) + sin(x + )
= sin x cos cos x sin + sin x cos + cos x sin
2
4
= 2 sin x cos = 2
(1) =
3
3
10. cos x +
+ cos
x = sin(x) + sin x = sin x + sin x = 0
2
2
8. sin =
C
O
299
10
10
1
15
3
8
, sin = , and in QIV = cos = , cos =
17
2
17
2
cos( + ) = cos cos sin sin
!
1
8
8 + 15 3
15
3
=
=
17
2
2
17
34
10
10
10
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B in QI
EP
E
tan x + tan y
1
=
1 tan x tan y
3
3 tan x + 3 tan y = 1 tan x tan y
1
1
3 tan x + 3
= 1 tan x
2
2
6 tan x + 3 = 2 tan x
1
tan x =
7
A + B = 45
1
tan A =
4
3
tan B =
5
1
1
16. Given: tan y = , tan(x + y) =
2
3
1 3
+
4 5 = 1
tan(A + B) =
1 3
1
4 5
csc B =
34
,
3
23
+ tan
9
36 = tan + 23 = tan 3 = 1
23
9
36
4
1 tan tan
9
36
tan
20. cot 2 =
300
3. sin A =
12
5
12
, A is in QII = cos A = , tan A =
13
13
5
5
3
4
3
cos B = , B is in QIV = sin B = , cos B = , tan A =
3
5
5
4
(a) cos(A B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B
5
4
12
3
56
=
+
=
13
5
13
5
65
PY
5
1. r = 6 cm, = 37.5 = 37.5
=
rad
180
24
5
5
(a) s = 6
=
cm
24
4
1
5
15
(b) A = (6)2
cm2
=
2
24
4
p
2. x = 1, y = 2, r = (1)2 + (2)2 = 5
2 5 5
10 3 5
sin + cos + tan =
+
+2=
5
5
5
1
1
=
tan 2
tan( + )
1
=
tan + tan
1 tan2
1 tan2
cot tan
cot2 1
=
=
=
2 tan
2
2 cot
17.
C
O
4
5
and cos =
5
13
sin( + ) + sin( ) = sin cos + cos sin + sin cos cos sin
4
5
8
= 2 sin cos = 2
=
5
13
13
3
5
2
14. cos = , sin = , in QII = cos =
4
3
3
cos( + ) + cos( ) = cos cos sin sin + cos cos + sin sin
= 2 cos cos
!
5
3
5
=2
=
3
4
2
! !
!
!
2 3 6
6
2
3
2
(b) cos(A B) =
+
=
3
2
3
2
6
6+2 3
=2 2+3
(c) tan(A B) =
2 3 6
cos(A B) > 0 and sin(A B) > 0 = A B in QI
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
1. Asector = cm2 , = 30 = 30
= rad
3
180
6
1 2
=
r = r = 2 cm = 2
= cm
3
2 6
6
3
301
(8)2 + (6)2 = 10
2 6
4
tan + tan
7
4
3 = 1 + 3 = 2 3
= tan
+
=
5. tan
12
4
3
1 3
1 tan tan
4
3
8
3. sin A =
17
15 8
7
A + cos
A = cos A + sin A =
+
=
sin
2
2
17
17
17
2. x = 8, y = 6, r =
8.
7.
2
1
1
= sin2 x 2 sin x cos x + cos2 x =
3
9
1
8
4
= 1 2 sin x cos x = = 2 sin x cos x = = sin x cos x =
9
9
9
sin x
= sin x cos x
sec x
1
sin x cos x =
3
tan2 x
tan2 x
tan x
=
=
= sin x cos x
3
tan x + tan x
tan x(1 + tan2 x)
sec2 x
PY
3
4
4
6. cos A = , A is in QIII = sin A = , tan A =
5
5
3
24
24
7
tan B = , B is in QIII = sin B = , cos B = ,
7
25
25
(a) sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
4
7
3
24
4
=
=
5
25
5
25
5
4 24
1
1 tan A tan B
3
3 7
=
(b) cot(A + B) =
=
4
24
tan A + tan B
4
+
3
7
C
O
1 3
divided into 6 equilateral triangles. Hence, B
,
. Same coordinates
2 2
for C, E and F , except that they will just vary in signs depending on the
quadrant.
x
1
2
8. y = 2 sin
+
1 = y = 2 sin
x+
1
2 3
2
3
2
, Amplitude = 2, Range = [3, 1]
P = 4, Phase Shift =
3
tan 57 + tan 78
= tan(57 + 78) = tan 135 = 1
1 tan 57 tan 78
p
4.
12
3
+
tan A + tan B
33
5
4
=
(b) tan(A B) =
=
12
3
1 + tan A tan B
56
1+
5
4
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7
9
4 2
9
(d) sec 2 =
(c) tan 2 =
1
8
5
8
10. cos 8
9. sin2
5
8
2 2
4
and cos2 15 =
1 cos y
1 cos y sin y
1
sin y
sin y
=
sin y
sin y + 1 + cos y
+1
1 + cos y
1 + cos y
1 cos2 y sin y sin y cos y
=
sin2 y + sin y + sin y cos y
sin2 y sin y sin y cos y
=
sin2 y + sin y + sin y cos y
sin y 1 cos y
=
.
sin y + 1 + cos y
4 tan (1 tan2 )
1 tan2 + tan4
tan 12 y 1
11.
=
tan 12 y + 1
6. tan 4 =
5. tan x =
1 5
2
2 3
4
1/2
2/2
3/2
302
PY
6. (a) (1 4 2)/3
(b) 35/17
(c) /6
(b) /6
5. (a) 3/4
(d)
(c) (2 + 3)/4
(e) 5/6
(d) 2
(b) 119/169
(c) 33/65
(f) 0.2533
3. (a) 24/25
(e)
(c) 1
(d) /4
(g) 1/2
(f) 15/15
(b) /4
2. (a) /6
1. (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1 + sec1 t
1
1 + cos t
csc t(sec t + 1)
=
= cot t(sec t + 1)
=
1 =
1
sin t
sec t
tan 2 t
csc t
2+ 3
13. (a) cos 105 =
(b) tan 22.5 = 2 1
2
12. cot 12 t =
C
O
2+ 3
4
(f) cot 2 =
9 2
8
7 2
8
9
7
4 2
7
3. cos(2t) =
(b) cos 2 =
1. (a) sin 2 =
(e) csc 2 =
EP
E
18
x
1
+ 2 = tan
x
+2
3
3
6
P = 3, phase shift =
6
9. y = tan
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
7. {/2, /6}
6. {(2k + 1)/2 | k Z}
3. (a) (3, 0)
(d) (4 3, 4)
8. {0, /2, , 3/2} {/6, /3, 2/3, 5/6, 7/6, 4/3, 5/3, 11/6}
3. {2k/3 | k Z}
2.
1. {(2k + 1)/2 | k Z}
303
PY
2
0
119
169
120
169
2 tan x
.
1 tan2 x
4 6 2
(d) sec(2) =
169
119
3
103
3. (a) tan 15 = 2
(b) sin(2) =
1. (a) cos(2) =
6. = tan1 (800/600) 53.13 , that is, the angle of elevation of the helicopter
from the truck driver is 53.13
C
O
(b)
r 4
5. (a) r = 4 cos 2
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3
0, ,
2 2
5/6
7/6
/2
3/2
304
336
527
(c) tan(2) =
4 6 2
(b) tan(/24) =
6 2
4
5/6
2 3
/3
/2
2/3
(f) (x, y) = ( 15
, 152 3 )
2
(e) (x, y) = (, 0)
8
(f) (r, ) = (17, tan1 ( 15
))
9. (a) (x, y) = (2 3, 2)
(e) (r, ) = ( 2, 4 )
3/4
2 2
7/6
5/4 4/3 3/2
2 3 2 2
1
2
/6
/4
2+ 3 2+ 2
PY
7. r = 2 + 2 cos
1
3
3 16 3
4. cos cos1 + cos1
=
7
5
35
5 7 13 15 5
3 4 5
, , ,
6.
, ,
,
, ,
5.
4 4 3 3
8 8 8
8 4 4
3. (a) tan(/12) = 2
C
O
527
1. (a) cos(2) = 625
( 9 2 3 , 92 )
12
)
5
(e) (r, ) = (2 2, 4 )
(f) (x, y) =
2/3
3/4
2 3 2 2
5 7 11
0, , 2, , , ,
6 6 6 6
5/4
4/3
2 + 2 2 + 3
(b) (x, y) =
9. (a) (x, y) =
( 32 , 3 2 3 )
( 452 2 , 452 2 )
EP
E
6.
/4
/3
2 2 2 3
/6
7. r = 2 2 sin
5.
References
[1] R.N. Aufmann, V.C. Barker, and R.D. Nation, College Trigonometry, Houghton
Mifflin Company, 2008.
[2] E.A. Cabral, M.L.A.N. De Las Pe
nas, E.P. De Lara-Tuprio, F.F. Francisco,
I.J.L. Garces, R.M. Marcelo, and J.F. Sarmiento, Precalculus, Ateneo de
Manila University Press, 2010.
PY
C
O
[5] M.L. Lial, J. Hornsby, and D.I. Schneider, College Algebra and Trigonometry
and Precalculus, Addison-Wesley Educational Publisher, Inc., 2001.
[6] J. Stewart, L. Redlin, and S. Watson, Precalculus: Mathematics for Calculus,
Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, 2012.
[7] M. Sullivan, Algebra & Trigonometry, Pearson Education, Inc., 2012.
EP
E
[8] C. Young, Algebra and Trigonometry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2013.
305
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.